Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 394

Fiber Service Platform 3000R7

(FSP 3000R7)

Hardware Description
Document Version 7.1.5 (June 2007)
Product Release 7.1.5
HWD_Cover.fm
Copyright © 2001-2007 ADVA AG Optical Networking. All rights reserved.
All rights reserved. Hardware and software mentioned in this document includes software developed by
ADVA AG Optical Networking ("ADVA"), the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org), Teodor
Danciu (http://jasperreports.sourceforge.net), and/or other open source software. Some software was cre-
ated using ORBacus for Java by Object-Oriented Concepts, Inc.

Trademarks
The terms ADVA and FSP 3000R7 are trademarks or registered trademarks of ADVA in the United States,
Germany and/or other countries. All other company, product, or service mentioned in this document may
be trademarks or service marks of ADVA or their respective owner.

Patents
The content described in this document may be covered by patents or pending patent applications of AD-
VA. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents.

Disclaimers
The content of this document could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors, and is subject
to change at any time without notice. Reliance on this content is at the relying party's sole risk and will
not create any liability or obligation for ADVA. Any references in this document to non-ADVA publications
and/or non-ADVA Internet sites are provided for convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an
endorsement of those publications and/or Internet sites. The materials within those publications and/or
Internet sites are not part of the materials for any ADVA information, product or service, and use of those
publications and/or Internet sites is at your own risk.

THE CONTENT OF THIS DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, IN-
CLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PAR-
TICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL ADVA, ITS AFFILIATES, EMPLOYEES, OFFICERS OR
ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUEN-
TIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENT, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE. THE SAME APPLIES FOR ANY HARDWARE OR SOFTWARE COVERED BY THIS DOCUMENT, UNLESS A
SIGNED AGREEMENT WITH ADVA OR THE APPLICABLE PRODUCT LIABILITY LAW EXPRESSLY STATES OTHER-
WISE.

ADVA AG Optical Networking


Headquarters
Campus Martinsried
Fraunhoferstr. 9 A
82152 Martinsried/Muenchen
Germany
Phone +49(0)89-890665-848
Fax +49(0)89-890665-22848
www.advaoptical.com
HWD_Cover.fm

ii FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


Table of Contents

Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii


List of Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
List of Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Purpose and Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Document Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxii
Typographic Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxii
Safety Symbol and Message Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxii
Related Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiv
Obtaining Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiv
World Wide Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiv
Documentation CD-ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiv
Ordering Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv
Documentation Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv
Obtaining Technical Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv
Contact ADVA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvi
EMC, Laser Safety and Compliance Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvii
WEEE Compliance Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvii

Document Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxix


Acronyms & Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxiii

Chapter 0 Introduction

Chapter 1 Shelves and Components


1.1 SH7HU Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.2 PSU/7HU-DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1.3 PSU/7HU-AC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1.4 FAN/Plug-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1.5 SH1HU/2DC Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
1.6 SH1HU-P/DCM Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
HWDTOC.fm

FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description Document Version 7.1.5 iii


Table of Contents

Chapter 2 Core Type Channel Modules


2.1 WCC-PC-10G-U#Dxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.2 WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.3 WCC-PCTN-10G-LN#D01-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
2.4 WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
2.5 WCC-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
2.6 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#D01-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
2.7 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
2.8 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Cxxxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31
2.9 WCC-PC1N-2G7U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
2.10 WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38
2.11 WCC-PC-2G7U-V#Cxxxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42
2.12 4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44

Chapter 3 Access Type Channel Modules


3.1 WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.2 WCA-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.3 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11
3.4 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Cxxxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
3.5 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18
3.6 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Cxxxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
3.7 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-L#Cxxxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26
3.8 WCA-PCN-2G5U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
3.9 2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33
3.10 2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38
3.11 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43
3.12 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Cxxxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-47

Chapter 4 Enterprise Type Channel Modules


4.1 WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.2 WCE-LS-T-V#Cxxxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4.3 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10
4.4 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Cxxxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15

Chapter 5 Pluggable Transceivers


5.1 Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2 SFP/XFP Optical Transceivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.3 SFP Electrical Gigabit Ethernet Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Chapter 6 Management and Switch Modules


6.1 NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13
6.2 NCU (NCU2E Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-19
6.3 SCU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-24
6.4 VSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-27
6.5 RSM-OLM#1630 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-30
6.6 RSM-SF#1510 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-34
6.7 RSM-SF#1310 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-37
HWDTOC.fm

iv FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


Table of Contents

6.8 OSCM-V#1630. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41


6.9 2OSCM-V#1630 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44

Chapter 7 Optical Filter Modules


7.1 2CLSM-#D01-#D64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7.2 2BSM-#Dxx-#Dyy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7.3 4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7.4 8GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
7.5 1GSM+#Dxx-#Dyy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
7.6 4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
7.7 4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
7.8 40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
7.9 1CSM+#Dxx-E/W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
7.10 2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
7.11 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
7.12 4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
7.13 8CSM+#C1470-#C1610 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
7.14 1CSM+#G1310 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60
7.15 1CSM+#Cxxxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64
7.16 1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-68
7.17 OSFM+#1630 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-72
7.18 PSM-95/5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-75
7.19 1PM/SM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-78
7.20 1PM/MM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-81
7.21 2PM/SM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-84
7.22 2PM/MM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-88

Chapter 8 Optical Amplifiers


8.1 EDFA-C-S10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8.2 EDFA-L-S10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8.3 EDFA-C-S18-GC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8.4 EDFA-C-D20-GC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8.5 EDFA-C-D17-GC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
8.6 EDFA-L-D17-GC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

Chapter 9 Dispersion Compensation Modules


9.1 DCM-P/xx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.2 DCF-M/xxx/yyyy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.3 DCG-M/xxx/SSMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
9.4 DCF1HU-P Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

Chapter 10 Dummy Modules


HWDTOC.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 v


Table of Contents

Appendix A Electrical Cables


A.1 Power Cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
A.1.1 AC Power Cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
A.1.1.1 AC Power Cords for Operation in Continental Europe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
A.1.1.2 AC Power Cable for Operation in UK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
A.1.1.3 AC Power Cord for Operation in North America. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
A.1.2 DC Power Cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
A.1.3 Earthing Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
A.2 Serial and Ethernet Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
A.2.1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
A.2.2 Serial Null Modem Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
A.2.3 USB Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
A.2.4 Ethernet Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
A.2.4.1 Straight-Through Ethernet Cable Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
A.2.4.2 Crossover Ethernet Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14

Appendix B SCU-Intercom-Kit

Index

HWDTOC.fm

vi FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


List of Figures

Fig. 1-1: SH7HU Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2


Fig. 1-2: Shelf’s Earthing (Grounding) Connectors (Functional Earth) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Fig. 1-3: Fiber Finger Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Fig. 1-4: Front Cover Attached to the SH7HU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Fig. 1-5: Labeling the SH7HU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Fig. 1-6: Example of an SH7HU Shelf Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Fig. 1-7: Example of an SH7HU Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Fig. 1-8: Example of an SH7HU Shelf Supply Values Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Fig. 1-9: Example of the ESD and Laser Safety Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Fig. 1-10: PSU/7HU-DC Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Fig. 1-11: PSU/7HU-AC Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Fig. 1-12: FAN/Plug-In Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Fig. 1-13: Labeling the Fan Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Fig. 1-14: Example of a Fan Unit Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Fig. 1-15: Example of a Fan Unit Bar Code Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Fig. 1-16: SH1HU/2DC Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Fig. 1-17: Shelf’s Earthing (Grounding) Connectors (Functional Earth) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Fig. 1-18: Front Panel of the SH1HU/2DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Fig. 1-19: Labeling the SH1HU/2DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Fig. 1-20: Example of a SH1HU/2DC Shelf Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Fig. 1-21: Example of a SH1HU/2DC Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Fig. 1-22: Example of a SH1HU/2DC Shelf Supply Values Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Fig. 1-23: ESD and Laser Safety Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Fig. 1-24: Example of Placing the ESD and Laser Safety Label on the Rack . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Fig. 1-25: SH1HU-P/DCM Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Fig. 1-26: SH1HU-P/DCM Equipped with Two DCM-P/40s (Cascade Connection) . . . . . . . 1-24
Fig. 1-27: Example of a SH1HU-P/DCM Shelf Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Fig. 1-28: Example of a SH1HU-P/DCM Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26

Fig. 2-1: WCC-PC-10G-U#Dxx Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5


Fig. 2-2: WCC-PC-10G-U#Dxx Functional Block Diagram (Simplified) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Fig. 2-3: Example of a WCC-PC-10G-U#Dxx Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Fig. 2-4: Example of a WCC-PC-10G-U#Dxx Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Fig. 2-5: Example of a WCC-PC-10G-U#Dxx Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Fig. 2-6: WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32 Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Fig. 2-7: WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32 Functional Block Diagram (Simplified) . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Fig. 2-8: Example of a WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32 Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Fig. 2-9: Example of a WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Fig. 2-10: Example of a WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32 Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Fig. 2-11: Example of a WCC-PCTN-10G-LN#D01-32 Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Fig. 2-12: Example of a WCC-PCTN-10G-LN#D01-32 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
HWDLOF.fm

FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description Document Version 7.1.5 vii


List of Figures

Fig. 2-13: Example of a WCC-PCTN-10G-LN#D01-32 Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14


Fig. 2-14: WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Fig. 2-15: WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx Functional Block Diagram (Simplified) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Fig. 2-16: Example of a WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Fig. 2-17: Example of a WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Fig. 2-18: Example of a WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Fig. 2-19: Example of a WCC-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Fig. 2-20: Example of a WCC-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Fig. 2-21: Example of a WCC-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Fig. 2-22: 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#D01-32 Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
Fig. 2-23: 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#D01-32 Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23
Fig. 2-24: Example of a 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#D01-32 Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . .2-24
Fig. 2-25: Example of a 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#D01-32 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Fig. 2-26: Example of a 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#D01-32 Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Fig. 2-27: 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
Fig. 2-28: 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Fig. 2-29: Example of a 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
Fig. 2-30: Example of a 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
Fig. 2-31: Example of a 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
Fig. 2-32: Example of a 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Cxxxx Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31
Fig. 2-33: Example of a 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Cxxxx Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32
Fig. 2-34: Example of a 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Cxxxx Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32
Fig. 2-35: WCC-PC1N-2G7U Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
Fig. 2-36: WCC-PC1N-2G7U Functional Block Diagram (Simplified) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
Fig. 2-37: Example of a WCC-PC1N-2G7U Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36
Fig. 2-38: Example of a WCC-PC1N-2G7U Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
Fig. 2-39: Example of a WCC-PC1N-2G7U Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
Fig. 2-40: WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38
Fig. 2-41: WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx Functional Block Diagram (Simplified) . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40
Fig. 2-42: Example of a WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41
Fig. 2-43: Example of a WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41
Fig. 2-44: Example of a WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41
Fig. 2-45: Example of a WCC-PC-2G7U-V#Cxxxx Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42
Fig. 2-46: Example of a WCC-PC-2G7U-V#Cxxxx Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43
Fig. 2-47: Example of a WCC-PC-2G7U-V#Cxxxx Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43
Fig. 2-48: 4TCC-PCN-2G1U-2G5 Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44
Fig. 2-49: 4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5 Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46
Fig. 2-50: Example of a 4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5 Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47
Fig. 2-51: Example of a 4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48
Fig. 2-52: Example of a 4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5 Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48

Fig. 3-1: WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5


Fig. 3-2: WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Fig. 3-3: Example of a WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Fig. 3-4: Example of a WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Fig. 3-5: Example of a WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Fig. 3-6: Example of a WCA-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Fig. 3-7: Example of a WCA-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Fig. 3-8: Example of a WCA-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Fig. 3-9: 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11
HWDLOF.fm

viii FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


List of Figures

Fig. 3-10: 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx Functional Block Diagram (Simplified) . . . . . . . . . 3-14


Fig. 3-11: Example of a 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Fig. 3-12: Example of a 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Fig. 3-13: Example of a 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Fig. 3-14: Example of a 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Cxxxx Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Fig. 3-15: Example of a 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Cxxxx Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Fig. 3-16: Example of a 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Cxxxx Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Fig. 3-17: 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Fig. 3-18: 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx Functional Block Diagram (Simplified) . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Fig. 3-19: Example of a 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Fig. 3-20: Example of a 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Fig. 3-21: Example of a 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Fig. 3-22: Example of a 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Cxxxx Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Fig. 3-23: Example of a 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Cxxxx Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Fig. 3-24: Example of a 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Cxxxx Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Fig. 3-25: Example of a 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-L#Cxxxx Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Fig. 3-26: Example of a 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-L#Cxxxx Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Fig. 3-27: Example of a 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-L#Cxxxx Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Fig. 3-28: WCA-PCN-2G5U Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Fig. 3-29: WCA-PCN-2G5U Functional Block Diagram (Simplified) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Fig. 3-30: Example of a WCA-PCN-2G5U Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Fig. 3-31: Example of a WCA-PCN-2G5U Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Fig. 3-32: Example of a WCA-PCN-2G5U Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Fig. 3-33: 2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5 Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Fig. 3-34: 2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5 Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Fig. 3-35: Example of a 2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5 Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Fig. 3-36: Example of a 2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Fig. 3-37: Example of a 2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5 Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Fig. 3-38: 2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5 Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Fig. 3-39: 2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5 Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Fig. 3-40: Example of a 2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5 Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Fig. 3-41: Example of a 2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Fig. 3-42: Example of a 2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5 Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Fig. 3-43: 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Fig. 3-44: 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx Functional Block Diagram (Simplified) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Fig. 3-45: Example of a 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Fig. 3-46: Example of a 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Fig. 3-47: Example of a 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Fig. 3-48: Example of a 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Cxxxx Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Fig. 3-49: Example of a 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Cxxxx Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Fig. 3-50: Example of a 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Cxxxx Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48

Fig. 4-1: WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4


Fig. 4-2: WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Fig. 4-3: Example of a WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Fig. 4-4: Example of a WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Fig. 4-5: Example of a WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Fig. 4-6: Example of a WCE-LS-T-V#Cxxxx Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Fig. 4-7: Example of a WCE-LS-T-V#Cxxxx Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Fig. 4-8: Example of a WCE-LS-T-V#Cxxxx Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
HWDLOF.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 ix


List of Figures

Fig. 4-9: 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10


Fig. 4-10: 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13
Fig. 4-11: Example of a 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14
Fig. 4-12: Example of a 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14
Fig. 4-13: Example of a 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14
Fig. 4-14: Example of a 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Cxxxx Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15
Fig. 4-15: Example of a 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Cxxxx Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16
Fig. 4-16: Example of a 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Cxxxx Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16

Fig. 5-1: Example of a DWDM SFP Transceiver Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4


Fig. 5-2: Example of an Electrical SFP Transceiver Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Fig. 5-3: Example of a Package Label (SFP/2G5U/D1529.55V/SM/LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Fig. 5-4: Example of an SFP Transceiver (SFP/2G1/850I/MM/LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Fig. 5-5: Example of an XFP Transceiver (XFP/10G/1310S/SM/LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Fig. 5-6: Example of a DWDM SFP Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Fig. 5-7: SFP/GBE/ELECTRICAL/RJ45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Fig. 6-1: Example of NCU-A Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13


Fig. 6-2: Example of an NCU-A Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-18
Fig. 6-3: Example of an NCU-A Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-18
Fig. 6-4: NCU Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-19
Fig. 6-5: Example of an NCU Module Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-23
Fig. 6-6: Example of an NCU Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-23
Fig. 6-7: SCU Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-24
Fig. 6-8: Example of an SCU Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-26
Fig. 6-9: Example of an SCU Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-26
Fig. 6-10: VSM Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-27
Fig. 6-11: Operation Scheme of a VSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-28
Fig. 6-12: Example of a VSM Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-29
Fig. 6-13: Example of a VSM Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-29
Fig. 6-14: Example of a VSM Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-29
Fig. 6-15: RSM-OLM#1630 Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-30
Fig. 6-16: Operating Scheme of an RSM-OLM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-31
Fig. 6-17: Example of an RSM-OLM#1630 Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-32
Fig. 6-18: Example of an RSM-OLM#1630 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-33
Fig. 6-19: Example of an RSM-OLM#1630 Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-33
Fig. 6-20: RSM-SF Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-34
Fig. 6-21: Example of an RSM-SF#1510 Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-35
Fig. 6-22: Example of an RSM-SF#1510 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-36
Fig. 6-23: Example of an RSM-SF#1510 Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-36
Fig. 6-24: RSM-SF Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-37
Fig. 6-25: Example of an RSM-SF#1310 Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-39
Fig. 6-26: Example of an RSM-SF#1310 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-39
Fig. 6-27: Example of an RSM-SF#1310 Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-39
Fig. 6-28: RSM-SF#1310 working in tandem with RSM-SF#1510 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-40
Fig. 6-29: OSCM-V#1630 Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-41
Fig. 6-30: Operating Scheme of an OSCM-V#1630 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-42
Fig. 6-31: Example of an OSCM-V#1630 Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-43
Fig. 6-32: Example of an OSCM-V#1630 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-43
Fig. 6-33: Example of an OSCM-V#1630 Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-43
HWDLOF.fm

x FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


List of Figures

Fig. 6-34: 2OSCM-V#1630 Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44


Fig. 6-35: Operating Scheme of a 2OSCM-V#1630 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
Fig. 6-36: Example of an 2OSCM-V#1630 Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
Fig. 6-37: Example of an 2OSCM-V#1630 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
Fig. 6-38: Example of an 2OSCM-V#1630 Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46

Fig. 7-1: 2CLSM-#D01-#D64 Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5


Fig. 7-2: 2CLSM-#D01-#D64 Operating Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Fig. 7-3: Example of a 2CLSM-#D01-#D64 Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Fig. 7-4: Example of a 2CLSM-#D01-#D64 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Fig. 7-5: Example of a 2CLSM-#D01-#D64 Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Fig. 7-6: 2BSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Fig. 7-7: 2BSM-#D01-#D32 Operating Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Fig. 7-8: Example of a 2BSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Fig. 7-9: Example of a 2BSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Fig. 7-10: Example of a 2BSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Fig. 7-11: 4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Fig. 7-12: 4GSM-#D01-#D16 Operating Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Fig. 7-13: Example of a 4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Fig. 7-14: Example of a 4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Fig. 7-15: Example of a 4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Fig. 7-16: 8GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Fig. 7-17: 8GSM-#D01-#D32 Operating Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Fig. 7-18: Example of a 8GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Fig. 7-19: Example of a 8GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Fig. 7-20: Example of a 8GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Fig. 7-21: 1GSM+#Dxx-#Dyy Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Fig. 7-22: 1GSM+#D01-#D04 Operating Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Fig. 7-23: Example of a 1GSM+#Dxx-#Dyy Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Fig. 7-24: Example of a 1GSM+#Dxx-#Dyy Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Fig. 7-25: Example of a 1GSM+#Dxx-#Dyy Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Fig. 7-26: 4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Fig. 7-27: 4CSM-#D01-#D04 Operating Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
Fig. 7-28: Example of a 4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Fig. 7-29: Example of a 4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Fig. 7-30: Example of a 4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Fig. 7-31: 4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Fig. 7-32: 4CSM+#D01-#D04 Operating Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Fig. 7-33: Example of a 4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Fig. 7-34: Example of a 4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Fig. 7-35: Example of a 4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Fig. 7-36: 40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Fig. 7-37: 40CSM-#D02-#D32 Operating Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Fig. 7-38: Example of a 40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Fig. 7-39: Example of a 40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Fig. 7-40: Example of a 40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Fig. 7-41: 1CSM+#Dxx-E/W Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Fig. 7-42: 1CSM+#D01-E/W Operating Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
Fig. 7-43: Example of a 1CSM+#Dxx-E/W Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
Fig. 7-44: Example of a 1CSM+#Dxx-E/W Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
HWDLOF.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 xi


List of Figures

Fig. 7-45: Example of a 1CSM+#Dxx-E/W Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-44


Fig. 7-46: 2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610 Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-45
Fig. 7-47: 2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610 Operating Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-46
Fig. 7-48: Example of a 2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610 Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-47
Fig. 7-49: Example of a 2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-47
Fig. 7-50: Example of a 2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610 Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-47
Fig. 7-51: 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610 Front View Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-48
Fig. 7-52: 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610 Operating Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-49
Fig. 7-53: Example of a 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610 Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-50
Fig. 7-54: Example of a 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-51
Fig. 7-55: Example of a 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610 Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-51
Fig. 7-56: 4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy Front View Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-52
Fig. 7-57: 4CSM-#C1470-#C1610 Operating Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-54
Fig. 7-58: Example of a 4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-55
Fig. 7-59: Example of a 4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-55
Fig. 7-60: Example of a 4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-55
Fig. 7-61: 8CSM+#C1470-#C1610 Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-56
Fig. 7-62: 8CSM+#C1470-#C1610 Operating Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-58
Fig. 7-63: Example of an 8CSM+#C1470-#C1610 Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-59
Fig. 7-64: Example of an 8CSM+#C1470-#C1610 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-59
Fig. 7-65: Example of an 8CSM+#C1470-#C1610 Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-59
Fig. 7-66: 1CSM+#G1310 Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-60
Fig. 7-67: 1CSM+#G1310 Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-60
Fig. 7-68: Operating This
Scheme
pageofintentionally
the 1CSM+#G1310
left blank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-61
Fig. 7-69: Example of a 1CSM+#G1310 Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-62
Fig. 7-70: Example of a 1CSM+#G1310 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-63
Fig. 7-71: Example of a 1CSM+#G1310 Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-63
Fig. 7-72: 1CSM+#Cxxxx Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-64
Fig. 7-73: 1CSM+#C1510 Operating Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-66
Fig. 7-74: Example of a 1CSM+#Cxxxx Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-66
Fig. 7-75: Example of a 1CSM+#Cxxxx Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-67
Fig. 7-76: Example of a 1CSM+#Cxxxx Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-67
Fig. 7-77: 1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-68
Fig. 7-78: 1CSM+#C1510-E/W Operating Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-70
Fig. 7-79: Example of a 1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-71
Fig. 7-80: Example of a 1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-71
Fig. 7-81: Example of a 1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-71
Fig. 7-82: OSFM#1630 Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-72
Fig. 7-83: OSFM#1630 Operating Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-73
Fig. 7-84: Example of a OSFM#1630 Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-74
Fig. 7-85: Example of a OSFM#1630 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-74
Fig. 7-86: Example of a OSFM#1630 Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-74
Fig. 7-87: PSM-95/5 Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-75
Fig. 7-88: PSM-95/5 Operating Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-76
Fig. 7-89: Example of a PSM-95/5 Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-77
Fig. 7-90: Example of a PSM-95/5 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-77
Fig. 7-91: Example of a PSM-95/5 Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-77
Fig. 7-92: 1PM/SM Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-78
Fig. 7-93: 1PM/SM Operating Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-79
Fig. 7-94: Example of a 1PM/SM Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-80
HWDLOF.fm

xii FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


List of Figures

Fig. 7-95: Example of a 1PM/SM Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-80


Fig. 7-96: Example of a 1PM/SM Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-80
Fig. 7-97: 1PM/MM Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-81
Fig. 7-98: 1PM/MM Operating Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-82
Fig. 7-99: Example of a 1PM/MM Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-83
Fig. 7-100: Example of a 1PM/MM Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-83
Fig. 7-101: Example of a 1PM/MM Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-83
Fig. 7-102: 2PM/SM Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-84
Fig. 7-103: 2PM/SM Operating Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-85
Fig. 7-104: Example of a 2PM/SM Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-86
Fig. 7-105: Example of a 2PM/SM Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-86
Fig. 7-106: Example of a 2PM/SM Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-87
Fig. 7-107: 2PM/MM Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-88
Fig. 7-108: 2PM/MM Operating Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-89
Fig. 7-109: Example of a 2PM/MM Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-90
Fig. 7-110: Example of a 2PM/MM Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-90
Fig. 7-111: Example of a 2PM/MM Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-91

Fig. 8-1: EDFA-C-S10 Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3


Fig. 8-2: Operating Scheme of an EDFA-C-S10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Fig. 8-3: Example of a EDFA-C-S10 Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Fig. 8-4: Example of a EDFA-C-S10 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Fig. 8-5: Example of a EDFA-C-S10 Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Fig. 8-6: EDFA-L-S10 Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Fig. 8-7: Operating Scheme of an EDFA-L-S10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Fig. 8-8: Example of a EDFA-L-S10 Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Fig. 8-9: Example of a EDFA-L-S10 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Fig. 8-10: Example of a EDFA-L-S10 Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Fig. 8-11: EDFA-C-S18-GC Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Fig. 8-12: Operating Scheme of an EDFA-C-S18-GC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Fig. 8-13: Example of a EDFA-C-S18-GC Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Fig. 8-14: Example of a EDFA-C-S18-GC Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Fig. 8-15: Example of a EDFA-C-S18-GC Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Fig. 8-16: EDFA-C-D20-GC Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Fig. 8-17: Operating Scheme of an EDFA-C-D20-GC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Fig. 8-18: Example of a EDFA-C-D20-GC Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Fig. 8-19: Example of a EDFA-C-D20-GC Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Fig. 8-20: Example of a EDFA-C-D20-GC Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Fig. 8-21: EDFA-C-D17-GC Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Fig. 8-22: Operating Scheme of an EDFA-C-D17-GC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Fig. 8-23: Example of a EDFA-C-D17-GC Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Fig. 8-24: Example of a EDFA-C-D17-GC Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Fig. 8-25: Example of a EDFA-C-D17-GC Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Fig. 8-26: EDFA-L-D17-GC Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Fig. 8-27: Operating Scheme of an EDFA-L-D17-GC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Fig. 8-28: Example of a EDFA-L-D17-GC Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Fig. 8-29: Example of a EDFA-L-D17-GC Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Fig. 8-30: Example of a EDFA-L-D17-GC Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23

Fig. 9-1: Example of a DCM-P/80 Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2


HWDLOF.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 xiii


List of Figures

Fig. 9-2: Example of DCM-P/80 Top View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2


Fig. 9-3: Example of a DCM-P/80 Front Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Fig. 9-4: Example of a DCM-P/80 Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Fig. 9-5: Example of a DCM-P/80 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Fig. 9-6: Example of DCF-M/010/SSMF Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Fig. 9-7: Example of a DCF-M/xxx/yyyy Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Fig. 9-8: Example of a DCF-M/xxx/yyyy Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Fig. 9-9: Example of a DCF-M/xxx/yyyy Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Fig. 9-10: Example of DCG-M/060/SSMF Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Fig. 9-11: Example of a DCG-M/xxx/SSMF Module Type Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Fig. 9-12: Example of a DCG-M/xxx/SSMF Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Fig. 9-13: Example of a DCG-M/xxx/SSMF Warranty Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Fig. 9-14: Front View DCF1HU-P/40/SSMF Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11

Fig. 10-1: View of a DM/5HU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-1

Fig. A-1: Example of an AC Power Cord IEC320 C-13 to CEE 7/7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Fig. A-2: Example of an AC Power Cord IEC320 C-13 to BS 1363 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Fig. A-3: Example of an AC Power Cord IEC320 C-13 to NEMA 5-15P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
Fig. A-4: DC Power Cord Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Fig. A-5: Example of an Equipment End of a 2-Conductor DC Power Cord . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
Fig. A-6: Example of an Earthing Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
Fig. A-7: Pin Positioning of a Male RJ-45 Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13

Fig. B-1: Example of an SCU-Intercom-Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2


Fig. B-2: Connecting Patch Cables to the SCU or SCU-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2

HWDLOF.fm

xiv FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


List of Tables

Table 2-1: Core Type Channel Module Naming Convention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2


Table 2-2: WCC-PC-10G-U#Dxx Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Table 2-3: WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32 Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Table 2-4: WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Table 2-5: 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#D01-32 Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Table 2-6: 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Table 2-7: WCC-PC1N-2G7U Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Table 2-8: WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Table 2-9: 4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5 Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44

Table 3-1: Access Type Channel Module Naming Convention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2


Table 3-2: WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx Optical Port Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Table 3-3: WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx LED Indicator Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Table 3-4: 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx Optical Port Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Table 3-5: 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx LED Indicator Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Table 3-6: 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx Optical Port Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Table 3-7: 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx LED Indicator Markings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Table 3-8: WCA-PCN-2G5U Optical Port Markings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Table 3-9: WCA-PCN-2G5U LED Indicator Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Table 3-10: 2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5 Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Table 3-11: 2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5 Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Table 3-12: 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx Optical Port Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Table 3-13: 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx LED Indicator Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44

Table 4-1: WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx Optical Port Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5


Table 4-2: WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx LED Indicator Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Table 4-3: 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx Optical Port Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Table 4-4: 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx LED Indicator Markings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

Table 5-1: Pluggable Transceiver Naming Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Table 6-1: NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13


Table 6-2: NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS Management Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Table 6-3: Male SUB-D9 Connector Pinout (NCU-A, NCU-B, NCU-GDPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Table 6-4: Mini-AB USB Type Receptacle Pinout (NCU-A, NCU-B,
NCU-GDPS) 6-16
Table 6-5: RJ-45 Panel Jack Pinout (NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Table 6-6: NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS Factory-Default Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Table 6-7: NCU Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Table 6-8: RJ-45 Panel Jack Pinout (NCU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Table 6-9: Mini-AB USB Receptacle Pinout (NCU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
HWDLOT.fm

FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description Document Version 7.1.5 xv


List of Tables

Table 6-10: NCU Factory-Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-22


Table 6-11: SCU Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-24
Table 6-12: VSM Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-27
Table 6-13: VSM Push Button Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-28
Table 6-14: RSM-OLM#1630 Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-31
Table 6-15: Push Button Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-32
Table 6-16: RSM-SF#1510 Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-34
Table 6-17: Push Button Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-36
Table 6-18: RSM-SF#1310 Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-37
Table 6-19: RSM-SF#1310 Push Button Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-38
Table 6-20: OSCM Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-41
Table 6-21: OSCM Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-44

Table 7-1: 2CLSM-#D01-#D64 Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5


Table 7-2: 2BSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Table 7-3: 4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12
Table 7-4: 4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Channel Group Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13
Table 7-5: 8GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16
Table 7-6: 8GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Client Port Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17
Table 7-7: 1GSM+#Dxx-#Dyy Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20
Table 7-8: 1GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Channel Group Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-21
Table 7-9: 4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-24
Table 7-10: 4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy C band Client Port Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-25
Table 7-11: 4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy L band Client Port Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-26
Table 7-12: 4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-30
Table 7-13: 4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy C band Client Port Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-32
Table 7-14: 4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy L band Client Port Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-33
Table 7-15: 40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-36
Table 7-16: 40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy Client Port Allocation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-37
Table 7-17: 1CSM+#Dxx-E/W Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-41
Table 7-18: 2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610 Faceplate Markings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-45
Table 7-19: 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610 Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-48
Table 7-20: 4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-52
Table 7-21: 4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy Client Port Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-53
Table 7-22: 8CSM+#C1470-#C1610 Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-56
Table 7-23: 8CSM+#C1470-#C1610 Client Port Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-57
Table 7-24: 1CSM+#G1310 Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-60
Table 7-25: 1CSM+ for CWDM Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-64
Table 7-26: 1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-68
Table 7-27: OSFM#1630 Faceplate Markings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-72
Table 7-28: PSM-95/5 Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-75
Table 7-29: 1PM/SM Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-78
Table 7-30: 1PM/MM Faceplate Markings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-81
Table 7-31: 2PM/SM Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-84
Table 7-32: 2PM/MM Faceplate Markings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-88

Table 8-1: EDFA-C-S10 Faceplate Markings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3


Table 8-2: EDFA-L-S10 Faceplate Markings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Table 8-3: EDFA-C-S18-GC Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Table 8-4: EDFA-C-D20-GC Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
HWDLOT.fm

xvi FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


List of Tables

Table 8-5: EDFA-C-D17-GC Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16


Table 8-6: EDFA-L-D17-GC Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

Table 9-1: DCM-P/xx Module Variants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3


Table 9-2: DCF-M/xxx/yyyy Faceplate Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Table 9-3: DCF-M/xxx/yyyy Module Variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Table 9-4: DCG-M/xxx/SSMF Faceplate Markings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Table 9-5: DCF1HU-P Shelf Variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Table 10-1: Dummy Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

Table A-1: Wire Coding and Specifications of the 2-Conductor DC Power Cords . . . . . . . . .A-6
Table A-2: Wire Coding and Specifications of a 3-Conductor DC Power Cord . . . . . . . . . . .A-7
Table A-3: Serial and Ethernet Cable Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
Table A-4: Wiring for Serial Null Modem Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
Table A-5: Standard USB Type A Plug Pinout and Cable Color Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
Table A-6: Mini-USB Type A Plug Pinout and Cable Color Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
Table A-7: Ethernet Cable Types Used by the FSP 3000R7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
Table A-8: RJ-45 Connector Wiring Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
Table A-9: Example of a 10Base-T/100Base-TX Straight-Through Cable Pinout
according to 568B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
Table A-10: Example of a 1000Base-T Straight-Through Cable Pinout according to 568B . . A-14
Table A-11: Example of a 10Base-T/100Base-TX Crossover Cable Pinout according to 568B A-14
Table A-12: Example of a 1000Base-T Crossover Cable Pinout according to 568B . . . . . . . A-15
HWDLOT.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 xvii


List of Tables

This page intentionally left blank

HWDLOT.fm

xviii FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


Preface

The Preface gives general information for the effective use of the Fiber
Service Platform 3000R7 (FSP 3000R7) Hardware Description.

This publication is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty


for accuracy and completeness.

The FSP 3000R7 Hardware Description replaces Part I of the FSP 3000R7
Reference Guide.
Note

Purpose and Scope


The purpose of this documentation is to provide general descriptions of
the FSP 3000R7 hardware components and their anticipated uses.

Audience
This documentation is primarily intended to be read by any persons who
are not familiar with the FSP 3000R7 system. It is also intended for
trained persons requiring details on hardware components and for readers
who want to achieve better understanding of the system components.

Organization
This documentation is organized as follows:

“Preface”
Describes the purpose, audience, organization and the conventions, that
are used throughout this documentation. It lists related documentation
that are referenced in this guide, and other resources that you can use to
learn more about FSP 3000R7. In addition, important ADVA Optical Net-
working AG (ADVA) contact details, EMC, Laser Safety and Compliance
Statements as well as further useful information are provided.

“Document Revision History”


This section lists significant changes (additions, corrections, etc.) made
in the separate issues of this documentation.
HWD_Preface.fm

FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description Document Version 7.1.5 xix


Hardware Description

“Acronyms & Abbreviations”


This section contains the acronyms, abbreviations and symbols used
throughout this documentation. The terms and their spelled out forms or
their meaning are listed in alphabetical order.

Chapter 0 “Introduction”
This chapter gives an of the FSP 3000R7 system components.

Chapter 1 “Shelves and Components”


This chapter provides detailed descriptions of the various shelves that
comprise the FSP 3000R7, such as the 1HU Shelf, the 7HU Shelf and the
DCM Shelf. Detailed information about the power supplies and the fan
unit are also provided.

Chapter 2 “Core Type Channel Modules”


This chapter provides the general descriptions of all core type channel
modules available, their main features, service types and how the mod-
ules operate. Also provided are details of the naming conventions.

Chapter 3 “Access Type Channel Modules”


This chapter provides the general descriptions of all access type channel
modules available, their main features, service types and how the mod-
ules operate. Also provided are details of the naming conventions.

Chapter 4 “Enterprise Type Channel Modules”


This chapter provides the general descriptions of all enterprise type chan-
nel modules available, their main features, service types and how the
modules operate.

Chapter 5 “Pluggable Transceivers”


This chapter provides a general description of the pluggable transceiver
types used by the FSP 3000R7 channel modules, discusses the naming
conventions and provides identification information.

Chapter 6 “Management and Switch Modules”


This chapter describes the key features and functionality of the manage-
ment modules, the optical supervisory channel modules and the optical
protection switch modules available.

Chapter 7 “Optical Filter Modules”


This chapter provides functional descriptions of the various types of pas-
sive optical modules, such as channel splitter modules (CSMs), group
splitter modules (GSMs), band splitter modules (BSMs), optical superviso-
ry filter module (OSFM) and protection modules (PMs) available.

Chapter 8 “Optical Amplifiers”


This chapter describes the functionality and the features of the fixed
pump power Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifiers as well as the gain-controlled
Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifier types available.
HWD_Preface.fm

xx FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


Preface

Chapter 9 “Dispersion Compensation Modules”


This chapter describes the key features and function of the Dispersion
Compensation Modules (DCMs) used by the FSP 3000R7.

Chapter 10 “Dummy Modules”


This chapter describes the dummy modules used by the shelves.

Appendix A “Electrical Cables”


Appendix A provides general information about the power cables and the
grounding kit as well as the serial and Ethernet cables required for the
installation of a 7HU Shelf or 1HU Shelf.

Appendix B “SCU-Intercom-Kit”
Appendix B provides general information about the SCU-Intercom-Kit re-
quired for the interconnection the Shelf Control Units.

Appendix C “Power Input Fuses of the Modules”


Appendix C lists all FSP 3000R7 modules having a power input fuse. For
the purposes of information, details on fuse types, ratings and position
on the module boards are given.

“Index”
The Index provides a list of the major terms, arranged alphabetically to
help the reader more quickly and easily find specific information in this
documentation.
HWD_Preface.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 xxi


Hardware Description

Document Conventions
Typographic Conventions
The documentation follows these typographic conventions:

Convention Description
boldface font Indicates keywords and emphasized words when appearing in
main text areas. All warnings are in boldface font.
italic font Indicates a reference to a chapter, section, figure, table or
related documentation when appearing in main text areas.
All notes and side heads are in italic font.
boldface italic font All cautions and side head titles are in boldface italic font.
courier Everything you have to type into your computer is in
courier.
[] Elements in square brackets are optional.
| Alternative elements are separated by a vertical bar.
^ The symbol ^ represents the key labeled Control - for example,
the key combination ^D means that you have to hold down
the Control key while you press the D key.
< > References are enclosed in angle brackets, for example:
<Esc> The escape key, marked Esc
<Return> The Return key, marked ↵
<username> This reference, including the angle brackets, is
replaced by the appropriate user name.
Nonprinting characters, such as passwords.
““ Double inverted commas are used to enclose quoted text or a
cross-reference title.
• (bullet symbol) Used in bulleted list of items where the sequence of items is
not relevant.
1., 2., 3. ...or These numbering styles are used in lists of items where the
a., b., c. ... sequence of items is relevant, e.g. the steps listed in a
procedure
* or 1, 2 etc. Are used to point to table footnotes. The markers in the text
are arranged as continuous superscript numbers. Footnote
text (in smaller typeface) is placed at the bottom of a table
and starts with a superscript number.
Change bar (vertical Visually identifies new or changed material (text, figures,
black line usually in tables etc.)
the margin)
-> Refers you to additional information.

Safety Symbol and Message Conventions


The safety alert symbols with the appropriate signal words and the note
signs below are used throughout this documentation to identify
warnings, cautions and notes.
HWD_Preface.fm

xxii FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


Preface

This symbol accompanies any instruction that draws attention to


WARNING the risks caused by electricity. These risks could result in death or
serious injury if the instruction is ignored or not followed
correctly.

This symbol accompanies any instruction that draws attention to a


Caution potentially hazardous situation/condition. This situation/condition,
may result in minor or moderate injury, if the instruction is ignored
or not followed correctly.

This symbol accompanies any instruction that draws attention to the


Caution risk of possible laser radiation. This risk may result in serious eye
injury, if the instruction is ignored or not followed correctly.

This symbol accompanies any instruction that draws attention to the


Caution possibility of equipment damage due to electrostatic discharge (ESD).
Damage can occur, if the ESD-prevention instructions are ignored or not
followed correctly.

This symbol accompanies any instruction that draws attention to the risk
Caution of equipment damage, malfunction, process interruption or negative
impacts on surroundings. These events can occur, if the instruction is
ignored or not followed correctly.

A symbol that draws attention to the necessity and importance of


Notice carefully reading all instructions before any installation or operation
takes place. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or damage to
equipment.

This symbol accompanies any instruction that draws attention to the


Notice proper disposal of waste electrical or electronic equipment and its
components. Disregard of the instruction can threaten the environment.
HWD_Preface.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 xxiii


Hardware Description

This symbol accompanies any statement that the user should make a note
of.
Note

A symbol that draws attention to supplemental information and helpful


recommendations that should be observed to ensure smooth operation of
the equipment.

Related Documentation
Refer to the following documents for additional information about the
FSP 3000R7 system:
• FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Safety Guide
• FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Installation Guide
• FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 User Guide
• FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Troubleshooting Guide
• FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Module and System Specification
• FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Product Description
• FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Detailed System Description
• FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Detailed Procedures
• FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Deployment Rules
• FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Element Manager
• FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Network Planner

Obtaining Documentation
World Wide Web
You can access the most current ADVA documentation on the World Wide
Web via your partner login at:

http://www.advaoptical.com/

Documentation CD-ROM
The above mentioned documentation set is available on a CD-ROM which
is delivered with your product. The documentation CD-ROM is updated
with each product release and may be more current than printed
documentation.
HWD_Preface.fm

xxiv FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


Preface

Ordering Documentation
ADVA Partners can order the FSP 3000R7 documentation set and
additional literature through a local ADVA Optical Networking AG sales
representative. For more current product release information, please refer
to ADVA’s home page, or contact ADVA’s Technical Support. See sections
“Obtaining Technical Assistance”, p. xxv and “Contact ADVA”, p. xxvi for
contact details.

Documentation Feedback
We want our FSP 3000R7 documentation to be as helpful as possible.
Feedback regarding the guide is therefore always welcome.

You can e-mail your comments/suggestions to:


global-techdocu@advaoptical.com

To submit your comments/suggestions by mail, use the following address:

ADVA AG Optical Networking


Technical Documentation
Maerzenquelle 1-3
98617 Meiningen-Dreissigacker
Germany

We appreciate and value your comments/suggestions to improve the


quality of the guide.

Obtaining Technical Assistance


Product Maintenance Agreements and other customer assistance
agreements are available for ADVA Optical Networking AG products
through your ADVA distribution channel. Our service options include:
• 7 X 24 telephone support
• Web-based support tools
• On-site support
• Technical training, both on-site and at ADVA facilities in Germany
and the USA
• Expedited repair service
• Extended hardware warranty service
Partner Login ADVA’s partner login provides a suite of interactive, networking services
that provide immediate access to ADVA information and resources at any
time, from anywhere in the world. This highly integrated internet
application is a powerful, easy-to-use tool for doing business with ADVA.

The partner login’s broad range of features and services help customers
and partners to streamline business processes and improve productivity.
HWD_Preface.fm

Through your partner login, you will find information tailored especially

Document Version 7.1.5 xxv


Hardware Description

for you, including networking solutions, services, and programs. In


addition, you can resolve technical issues with online support services,
download and test software packages, and order ADVA training materials.

Access your partner login via the ADVA home page at:
http://www.advaoptical.com

E-mail questions regarding the partner login to:


Support@advaoptical.com
Technical Support Technical support is available to warranty or maintenance contract
customers who need technical assistance with an ADVA product that is
under warranty or covered by a maintenance contract. To display ADVA’s
Technical Support web site that includes all contact information, go to
ADVA’s home page at:
http://www.advaoptical.com

and select the “Support” button.

To contact ADVA by E-mail, use one of the following addresses:

Europe, Middle East, Africa: Support@advaoptical.com


North America: Support-usa@advaoptical.com
Asia: Support-asia@advaoptical.com

Contact ADVA

ADVA AG Optical Networking Tel: +49 (0)89 89 06 65 0


Headquarters Fax: +49 (0)89 89 06 65 199
Fraunhoferstraße 9a info@advaoptical.com
82152 Martinsried/Munich
Germany

ADVA Optical Networking Inc. Tel: +1 201 258 8300


One International Blvd, Suite 705 Fax: +1 201 684 9200
Mahwah, NJ 07495 info@advaoptical.com
USA

ADVA Optical Networking Corp. Tel: +81 (0)3 5408 5891


World Trade Center Building 4F Fax: +81 (0)3 5408 5899
2-4-1 Hamamatsu-cho info-asiapacific@advaoptical.com
Minato-ku, Tokyo 105-6104
Japan
HWD_Preface.fm

xxvi FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


Preface

EMC, Laser Safety and Compliance Statements


WEEE Compliance Statement

The FSP 3000R7 product falls under the category 3


(IT and telecommunications equipment) in Annex
1A of the WEEE Directive 2002/96/EC of the
European Parliament. For the purposes of this
directive, the FSP 3000R7 product is marked with
the waste management symbol according to EN
50419 shown on the right. This symbol indicates
that the product must be disposed of as waste
electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE). The
marking also serves to clearly identify the
manufacturer of the product. For components
which cannot be appropriately marked because of the size, the symbol is
printed on their packaging.

It is your responsibility to dispose of your waste equipment by handing


it over to a designated collection point for the recycling of WEEE. The
separate collection and recycling of your WEEE at the time of disposal will
help to conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a
manner that protects human health and the environment.

ADVA Optical Networking AG (ADVA) complies with the requirements of


the Directive 2002/96/EC on WEEE and Directive 2002/95/EC on RoHS as
well as the respective national laws.

ADVA's WEEE registration number for Germany is: DE 49592479


HWD_Preface.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 xxvii


Hardware Description

This page intentionally left blank

HWD_Preface.fm

xxviii FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


Document Revision History

This document revision history lists the locations of, and the descriptions of significant
document changes (additions, corrections, etc.) made in the separate issues of this
documentation. They reflect the corresponding product release. When the changes are extensive,
a general statement giving the nature of the revisions is provided.

Document Product
Version No. Issue Date Details of Issue/Revision Reference Releases
7.1 March 2007 Reference Guide R. 7.0.6 was split into two Hardware Descriptions 7.1
manuals: Hardware Descriptions and Detailed Detailed Procedures
Procedures
Preface revised Preface, p. 1-xix
Introduction revised Chapter 0, p. 0-1
Description of SH7HU slightly revised; Section 1.1, p. 1-2
LED descriptions removed
Description of PSU/7HU-AC: LED descriptions Section 1.3, p. 1-12
removed
Description of FAN/Plug-In revised; labeling Section 1.4, p. 1-15
added; LED descriptions removed
Description of SH1HU/2DC revised; LED Section 1.5, p. 1-18
description removed
Description of SH1HU-P/DCM revised Section 1.6, p. 1-24
Table 2-1, p. 2-2 revised; LED description Chapter 2, p. 2-1,
removed
WCC-PC-10G-U#Dxx: XFP types added Section 2.1, p. 2-5
Description of WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx revised; Section 2.4, p. 2-15
XFP types added
Description of 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#D01-32 Section 2.6, p. 2-21
added
4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx: SFP types added Section 2.7, p. 2-26
Description of WCC-PC1N-2G7U added Section 2.9, p. 2-33
WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx: SFP types added Section 2.10, p. 2-38
Description of WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Cxxxx replaced Section 2.11, p. 2-42
by description of WCC-PC-2G7U-V#Cxxxx
Description of 4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5: SFP types Section 2.12, p. 2-44
added
Table 3-1, p. 3-2 revised; LED description Chapter 3, p. 3-1
removed
HWD_History.fm

FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description Document Version 7.1.5 xxix


Hardware Description

Document Product
Version No. Issue Date Details of Issue/Revision Reference Releases
WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx: XFP types added Section 3.1, p. 3-5
8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx: SFP types added: Section 3.3, p. 3-11
Connector labeling on the faceplate changed
(Figure 3-9)
Description of 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx revised, Section 3.5, p. 3-18
SFP types added
Description of 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Cxxxx revised Section 3.6, p. 3-24
Description of 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-L#Cxxxx added Section 3.7, p. 3-26
WCA-PCN-2G5U: SFP types added Section 3.8, p. 3-28
Description of 2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5 revised, Section 3.9, p. 3-33
SFP types added
Description of 2TCA-PCN-622+2G5 revised, Section 3.10, p. 3-38
SFP types added
Description of the SCU-E removed Chapter 4, p. 4-1
Description of NCU renamed as NCU-A, NCU-B Section 6.1, p. 6-13
and NCU-GDPS and revised; LED description of
the modules removed
Description of NCU (new module) added Section 6.2, p. 6-19
LED description of the SCU removed Section 6.3, p. 6-24
Description of 40CSM-DMX-#D02-#D32 and Chapter 7, p. 7-1
40CSM-DMX-#D33-#D63 (former Section 3.9)
removed: LED descriptions removed
Description of 2CLSM-#D01-#D64 revised; Section 7.1, p. 7-5
Description of 8GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy revised; Section 7.2, p. 7-8
Description of 2BSM-#Dxx-#Dyy revised; Section 7.3, p. 7-12
Description of 4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy revised; Section 7.4, p. 7-16
Description of 1GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy revised; Section 7.5, p. 7-20
Description of 4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy revised; Section 7.6, p. 7-24
Description of 4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy revised; Section 7.7, p. 7-30
Description of 40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy updated: Section 7.8, p. 7-36
module renamed; channel allocation of ports C1
changed;
Description of 1CSM+#Dxx-E/W revised; Section 7.9, p. 7-41
Description of 2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610 revised; Section 7.10, p. 7-45
3BSM-#G1310-#C1610: text beneath the side Section 7.11, p. 7-48
head “description” modified
Description of 4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy revised; Section 7.12, p. 7-52
Description of 8CSM+#C1470-#C1610 added Section 7.13, p. 7-56
Description of 1CSM+#G1310 revised; Section 7.14, p. 7-60
Description of 1CSM+#Cxxxx revised; Section 7.15, p. 7-64
Description of 1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W revised; Section 7.16, p. 7-68
Description of OSFM#1630 revised; Section 7.17, p. 7-72
Description of PSM-95/5 revised; Section 7.18, p. 7-75
HWD_History.fm

Description of 1PM/SM revised Section 7.19, p. 7-78


Description of 2PM/SM revised Section 7.20, p. 7-81

xxx FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


Document Revision History

Document Product
Version No. Issue Date Details of Issue/Revision Reference Releases
Description of 1PM/MM revised Section 7.21, p. 7-84
Description of 2PM/MM revised Section 7.22, p. 7-88
LED description of the EDFA-C-S10 removed. Section 8.1, p. 8-3
LED description of the EDFA-L-S10 removed. Section 8.2, p. 8-6
LED description of the EDFA-C-S18-GC removed. Section 8.3, p. 8-9
LED description of the EDFA-C-D20-GC removed. Section 8.4, p. 8-12
LED description of the EDFA-C-D17-GC removed. Section 8.5, p. 8-16
LED description of the EDFA-L-D17-GC removed. Section 8.6, p. 8-20
Description of DCM-P/xx added (includes former Section 9.1, p. 9-2
descriptions of DCM-P/20, DCM-P/40 and
DCM-P/80)
Description of DCF-M/xxx/yyyy added Section 9.2, p. 9-5
Description of DCG-M/xxx/SSMF added Section 9.3, p. 9-8
Description of DCF1HU-P Shelf added Section 9.4, p. 9-11
Description of DC power cords revised Appendix A, p. A-5
Description of USB cable revised Appendix A, p. A-10
7.1.5 June 2007 Description of fiber finger set added Section 1.1, p. 1-2 7.1.5
Description of WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32 added Section 2.2, p. 2-9
Description of WCC-PCTN-10G-LN#D01-32 added Section 2.3, p. 2-13
USB port of NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS slightly Section 6.1, p. 6-13
revised
USB port of NCU slightly revised Section 6.2, p. 6-19
Description of AC and DC power cords revised Appendix A, p. A-1
Labeling of all core channel access channel, Chapter 2, Chapter 3,
enterprise channel, management, switch, optical Chapter 4, Chapter 6,
filter, optical amplifier and dispersion Chapter 7, Chapter 8 and
compensation modules revised Chapter 9
HWD_History.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 xxxi


Hardware Description

This page intentionally left blank

HWD_History.fm

xxxii FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


Acronyms & Abbreviations

This section contains the acronyms, abbreviations and symbols used in the Hardware Description.
The terms and their spelled out forms or their meaning are listed in alphabetical order.

Symbols/Symbols/Numerics
A B C D E F G H I J K L M
N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Symbols/Numerics

% per cent
°C degree Celsius
°F degree Fahrenheit
ø diameter
Ω ohm (SI unit of electrical impedance or, in the direct current case, electrical
resistance)
“ inch (a unit of length)
10 GbE 10 Gigabit Ethernet
10 GbE WAN PHY 10 Gigabit Ethernet WAN physical layer
10 GE LAN 10 Gigabit Ethernet used in Local Area Network
10 GE WAN 10 Gigabit Ethernet used in Wide Area Network
1000BASE-T 1000 Mbit/s over twisted pair Cat 5e cable
100BASE-TX 100 Mbit/s over twisted pair Cat 5e cable (an Ethernet standard IEEE 802.3)
10BASE-T 10 Mbit/s over twisted pair Cat 5 cable (an Ethernet standard IEEE 802.3)
10G 10 Gigabit
10G FC 10 Gigabit Fiber Channel
10GbE LAN PHY 10 Gigabit Ethernet LAN physical layer
1CSM+#Cxxxx 1-port Channel Splitter Module adds/drops a single channel out of the CWDM
spectrum.
1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W East/West CWDM Single Channel Splitter Module (It adds/drops a single channel to/
HWD_Abbr.fm

out of the CWDM channel spectrum.)

FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description Document Version 7.1.5 xxxiii


Acronyms and Abbreviations

1CSM+#Dxx-E/W East/West DWDM Single Channel Splitter Module (It adds/drops a single channel to/
out of the DWDM channel spectrum.)
1CSM+#G1310 Single Channel Splitter Module (It adds/drops the broadband 1310-nm channel to/
out of the CWDM channel spectrum.)
1G 1 Gigabit
1G CL 1 Gigabit Coupling Link
1G CL 1 Gigabit Coupling Link
1G FC 1 Gigabit Fibre Channel (1.0625 Gbit/s)
1G FICON 1 Gigabit FICON
1GSM+ 1-port Group Splitter Module with upgrade port
1HU Shelf 1 HU-high equipment shelf
1PM/MM Single-port Protection Module Multimode
1PM/SM Single-port Protection Module Single Mode
2.5G 2.5 Gigabit
2ABSM- 2-port Band Splitter Module (It splits the 8 CWDM channels into two groups of 4
channels and vice versa.)
2BSM- 2-port Band Splitter Module (It splits the C-band or the L-band into red and blue
subbands and vice versa.)
2BSM-#D01-#D32 2-port Red/Blue Splitter C-Band
2BSM-#D33-#D64 2-port Red/Blue Splitter L-Band
2BSM-#Dxx-#Dyy 2-port Red/Blue Splitter for C- or L-band (collective name)
2CLSM C-Band/L-Band Splitter (short form for 2CLSM-#D01-#D64)
2CLSM-#D01-#D64 C-Band/L-Band Splitter
2G CL 2 Gbit/s Coupling Link
2G FC 2 Gigabit Fibre Channel (2.125 Gbit/s)
2G FICON 2 Gigabit FICON
2OSCM-V#1630 Optical Supervisory Channel Module with optical line monitoring and two optical
ports; the pilot laser operates at a wavelength of 1630 nm
2PM/MM 2-port Protection Module Multimode
2PM/SM 2-port Protection Module Single Mode
2R reshaping and reamplifying (signal regeneration)
2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5 access Type 2-port Multirate TDM channel module with two client and two network
pluggable interfaces, max. 1 Gbit/s client port data rate, aggregated data rate on
the network port of 2.5 Gbit/s
2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5 access type 2-port multirate TDM channel module with two client and two network
pluggable interfaces, max. 622 Mbit/s client port data rate, aggregated data rate on
the network port of 2.5 Gbit/s
3BSM-#G1310-#C1610 3-port Band Splitter Module
3R reshaping, reamplifying and retiming (signal regeneration)
40CSM-#D02-#D32 40-port MUX/DMX Channel Splitter C-band
40CSM-#D34-#D64 40-port MUX/DMX Channel Splitter L-band
40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy 40-port MUX/DMX Channel Splitter for C- or L-band (collective name)
4CSM- 4-port Channel Splitter Module for CWDM or DWDM
4CSM+ 4-port Channel Splitter Module for DWDM with upgrade port
4G FC 4 Gigabit Fibre Channel (4.250 Gbit/s)
HWD_Abbr.fm

4GSM-#D01-#D16 4-port Group Splitter Blue Band (C-Band)

xxxiv FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


Acronyms and Abbreviations

4GSM-#D17-#D32 4-port Group Splitter Red Band (C-Band)


4GSM-#D33-#D48 4-port Group Splitter Blue Band (L-Band)
4GSM-#D49-#D64 4-port Group Splitter Red Band (L-Band)
4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy 4-port Group Splitter for C- or L-band (collective name)
4TCA-LS+1G3-V access type 4-port low-speed TDM channel module for very-long reach fiber links;
aggregated data rate on the network port of 1.25 Gbit/s (collective name)
4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Cxxxx access type 4-port low-speed TDM channel module with four integrated 1310-nm
interfaces on the client side and a single integrated very-long reach CWDM interface
on the network side; aggregated data rate on the network port of 1.25 Gbit/s
4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx access type 4-port low-speed TDM channel module with four integrated 1310-nm
interfaces on the client side and a single integrated very-long reach DWDM inter-
face on the network side; aggregated data rate on the network port of 1.25 Gbit/s
4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-L#Cxxxx access type 4-port TDM channel module with four pluggable interfaces on the client
side and a single integrated long reach CWDM interface on the net-work side;
maximum client data rate of 4 Gbit/s; multirate clock user selectable; aggregated
data rate on the network port of 4 Gbit/s
4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V access type 4-port TDM channel module with four pluggable interfaces on the client
side and a single integrated very-long reach CWDM or DWDM interface on the net-
work side; maximum client data rate of 4 Gbit/s; multirate clock user selectable;
aggregated data rate on the network port of 4 Gbit/s (collective name)
4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Cxxxx access type 4-port TDM channel module with four pluggable interfaces on the client
side and a single integrated very-long reach CWDM interface on the net-work side;
maximum client data rate of 4 Gbit/s; multirate clock user selectable; aggregated
data rate on the network port of 4 Gbit/s
4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx access type 4-port TDM channel module with four pluggable interfaces on the client
side and a single integrated very-long reach DWDM interface on the net-work side;
maximum client data rate of 4 Gbit/s; multirate clock user selectable; aggregated
data rate on the network port of 4 Gbit/s
4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V core type 4-port TDM channel module with four pluggable interfaces on the client
side and a single integrated very-long reach CWDM or DWDM interface on the net-
work side; maximum client data rate of 2.7 Gbit/s; aggregated data rate on the
network port of 10 Gbit/s (collective name)
4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Cxxxx core type 4-port TDM channel module with four pluggable interfaces on the client
side and a single integrated very-long reach CWDM interface on the network side;
maximum client data rate of 2.7 Gbit/s; aggregated data rate on the network port
of 10 Gbit/s
4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx core type 4-port TDM channel module with four pluggable interfaces on the client
side and a single integrated very-long reach DWDM interface on the net-work side;
maximum client data rate of 2.7 Gbit/s; aggregated data rate on the network port
of 10 Gbit/s
4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5 core Type 4-port multirate TDM channel module with four client and two network
pluggable interfaces; max. client data rate of 2.125 Gbit/s; aggregated data rate on
the network port of 2.5 Gbit/s
4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#D01- core type 4-port TDM channel module with pluggable client interfaces and one
32 tunable network interface
7HU Shelf 7 HU-high equipment shelf
8CSM+#C1470-#C1610 8-port Channel Splitter Module with upgrade port is used to split/combine 8 CWDM
channels each and one gray channel.
8GSM 8-port group splitter module (short form for 8GSM-#D01-#D32 and 8GSM-#D33-
#D64)
8GSM-#D01-#D32 8-Port Group Splitter Module C-band
HWD_Abbr.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 xxxv


Acronyms and Abbreviations

8GSM-#D33-#D64 8-Port Group Splitter Module L-band


8GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy 8-port Group Splitter for C- or L-band (collective name)
8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V access type 8-port TDM channel module with eight pluggable interfaces on the
client side and a single integrated very-long reach CWDM or DWDM interface on the
network side; maximum client data rate of 2.1 Gbit/s; multirate clock user
selectable; aggregated data rate on the network port of 10 Gbit/s (collective name)
8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Cxxxx access type 8-port TDM channel module with eight pluggable interfaces on the
client side and a single integrated very-long reach CWDM interface on the network
side; maximum client data rate of 2.1 Gbit/s; multirate clock user selectable;
aggregated data rate on the network port of 10 Gbit/s
8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx access type 8-port TDM channel module with eight pluggable interfaces on the
client side and a single integrated very-long reach DWDM interface on the network
side; maximum client data rate of 2.1 Gbit/s; multirate clock user selectable;
aggregated data rate on the network port of 10 Gbit/s
8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V enterprise type 8-port ESCON TDM channel module for very-long reach fiber links;
aggregated data rate on the network port of 2.5 Gbit/s (collective name)
8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Cxxxx enterprise type 8-port ESCON TDM channel module with eight integrated 1310-nm
interfaces on the client side and a single integrated very-long reach CWDM inter-
face on the network side
8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx enterprise type 8-port ESCON TDM channel module with eight integrated 1310-nm
interfaces on the client side and a single integrated very-long reach DWDM inter-
face on the network side

A
A ampere (SI base unit of electric current, or amount of electric charge per second)
2
A s Ampere squared seconds (a measure of heat energy supplied to a circuit while the
fuse is clearing a fault.)
AC alternating current
acc. according to
ADVA ADVA Optical Networking AG
AID access identifier
AINS automatic in-service
AIS alarm indication signal
ALS automatic laser shutdown
ANSI American National Standards Institute
approx. approximately
APS automatic protection switching
ARC alarm reporting control
ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange
ASTA UK-based certification organization ()body for electrical testing and product safety
approval
ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode
ATM 155 Asynchronous Transfer Mode 155 Mbit/s
HWD_Abbr.fm

xxxvi FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


Acronyms and Abbreviations

ATM 622 Asynchronous Transfer Mode 622 Mbit/s


AWG American wire gauge (standard method of denoting wire diameter, especially for
electrically conducting wires)

B
B1 Bit Interleaved Parity covers the complete frame including overhead
B2 Bit Interleaved Parity covers payload area + Multiplexer Section Overhead
BI_DA- Bi-directional Data pair -A (Ethernet 1000BaseT–Twisted Pair Pinout)
BI_DA+ Bi-directional Data pair +A (Ethernet 1000BaseT–Twisted Pair Pinout)
BI_DB- Bi-directional Data pair -B (Ethernet 1000BaseT–Twisted Pair Pinout)
BI_DB+ Bi-directional Data pair +B (Ethernet 1000BaseT–Twisted Pair Pinout)
BI_DC- Bi-directional Data pair -C (Ethernet 1000BaseT–Twisted Pair Pinout)
BI_DC+ Bi-directional Data pair +C (Ethernet 1000BaseT–Twisted Pair Pinout)
BI_DD- Bi-directional Data pair -D (Ethernet 1000BaseT–Twisted Pair Pinout)
BI_DD+ Bi-directional Data pair +D (Ethernet 1000BaseT–Twisted Pair Pinout)
BS British Standard (specifies the type of domestic AC power plugs and sockets most
commonly used in the United Kingdom and Ireland)
BSM band splitter module (collective name)

C
ca. circa (approximately)
Cat 5 Category 5 cable (used for both 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX Ethernet)
Cat 5e Enhanced version of Cat 5 cable (used for both 100BASE-TX and 1000BASE-T
Ethernet)
Cat 6 Category 6 cable (used for both 100BASE-TX and 1000BASE-T Ethernet)
CCC China Compulsory Certification (certification mark)
CDR clock and data recovery
CEC Canadian Electrical Code
CH channel
ch. chapter
CIR committed information rate
CL coupling link
CLEI common language equipment identifier (registered trademark of Telcordia)
CLI command line interface
CLNP connectionless network protocol
HWD_Abbr.fm

cm centimeter (SI derived unit of length in the metric system)

Document Version 7.1.5 xxxvii


Acronyms and Abbreviations

CPE customer premises equipment


CSA Canadian Standards Association
CSF client signal fail
CSM channel splitter module (collective name)
CTS Clear To Send (serial connection)
CV coding violations
CWDM coarse wavelength division multiplexing

D
D- differential data signal in pinout of USB data cable (data - signal)
D+ differential data signal in pinout of USB data cable (data + signal)
dB decibel
dBm decibel milliwatt
DC direct current
DCCm digital communication channel for multiplexer section
DCCr digital communication channel for regenerator section
DCD Data Carrier Detect (serial connection)
DCF dispersion compensating fiber
DCF1HU-P Dispersion Compensation Module Shelf with an integrated DCF spool, rack-
mountable, 1 HU high
DCF-M/xxx/yyyy Dispersion Compensation Module (collective name)
The part /xxx of the module name refers to the compensation capability, and /yyyy
relates to the DCF type.
DCG-M/060/SSMF Fiber-Bragg-Grating Dispersion Compensation Module that compensates for 60 km
of G. 652 Standard Single-Mode Fiber
DCG-M/100/SSMF Fiber-Bragg-Grating Dispersion Compensation Module that compensates for 100 km
of G. 652 Standard Single-Mode Fiber
DCG-M/xxx/SSMF Fiber-Bragg-Grating Dispersion Compensation Module (collective name)
The part /xxx of the module name refers to the compensation capability.
DCM Dispersion Compensation Module (collective name)
DCM-P/20 Dispersion Compensation Module Plug-In 20km that compensates for 20 km of
G. 652 fiber
DCM-P/40 Dispersion Compensation Module Plug-In 40km that compensates for 40 km of
G. 652 fiber
DCM-P/80 Dispersion Compensation Module Plug-In 80km that compensates for 80 km of
G. 652 fiber
DCM-P/xx Plug-In Dispersion Compensation Module (collective name); The part/xx of the
module name refers to the compensation capability.
DCN data communication network
DE Disparity Errors
DEMUX (1) demultiplexer
HWD_Abbr.fm

(2) demultiplexing

xxxviii FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


Acronyms and Abbreviations

DFB laser distributed feed-back laser


DSA digital signature algorithm key encryption scheme
DSC digital supervisory channel
DSR Data Set Ready (serial connection)
DTR Data Terminal Ready (serial connection)
DW digital wrapper
DWDM dense wavelength division multiplexing

E
e.g. for example (exempli gratia)
e/o electrical to optical conversion
ECC embedded communication channel
EDFA Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifier (collective name)
EDFA-C-D17-GC optical amplifier, double stage 17 dBm maximum output power, gain controlled (C-
Band)
EDFA-C-D20-GC optical amplifier, double stage 20 dBm maximum output power, gain controlled (C-
Band)
EDFA-C-S10 group-based, fixed pump power, C-Band EDFA module, single stage, 10 dBm
maximum output power
EDFA-C-S18-GC optical amplifier, single stage 18 dBm maximum output power, gain controlled
(C-Band)
EDFA-L-D17-GC optical amplifier, double stage 17 dBm maximum output power, gain controlled
(L-Band)
EDFA-L-S10 optical amplifier, single stage 10 dBm with maximum output power (L-Band)
EFEC enhanced forward error correction
EIA Electronics Industry Alliance
EMC electromagnetic compatibility
EMI electromagnetic interference
EN European Standard
EOC embedded operations channel
EPT error propagation code
EQPT equipment
ESCON enterprise system connection
ESD electrostatic discharge
ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute
HWD_Abbr.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 xxxix


Acronyms and Abbreviations

F
FAN/Plug-In plug-in fan unit
FC (1) Fibre Channel (protocol)
(2) fixed clock
FCU Fan Control Unit
FDDI fiber distributed data interface -> Glossary
FE fast Ethernet
FEC forward error correction
FEND far end
FICON fiber connection (protocol)
FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
FSP Fiber Service Platform
FSP 3000R7 Fiber Service Platform 3000R7
FSP EM FSP Element Manager
FSP NM FSP Network Manager
FSP NP FSP Network Planner
FTP file transfer protocol
FWP firmware package

G
G Gigabit
GbE Gigabit Ethernet
Gbit/s gigabits per second (a unit of data transfer rate equal to 1.000.000.000 bits per
second)
GCC0 generic communication channel 0 in the OTU overhead
GFEC standard FEC
GFP Generic Framing Procedure according to ITU-T G.7041
GFP-F Generic Framing Procedure, frame-mapped
GFP-T Generic Framing Procedure, transparent-mapped
GHz gigahertz = 109 Hz (SI unit of frequency)
GND Signal ground (in pinout of serial cable, USB data cable or Ethernet cables)
GSM group splitter module
HWD_Abbr.fm

xl FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


Acronyms and Abbreviations

H
H height
HDLC High-Level Data Link Control -> Glossary
HP Horizontal Pitch (1 HP = 5.08 mm = 1/5 in)
HST hot standby
HU Height Unit (1 HU = 44.45 mm = 1.75 in)
HW Hardware
Hz hertz (SI base unit of frequency)

I
i.e. that is (id est)
I/O Input/Output
I2t melting integral or total clearing (fuse characteristic)
ID (1) identification (identification number)
(2) identification pin (in pinout of USB data cable)
In rated current
in. inch (unit of length)
IP internet protocol
IPv4 internet protocol version 4
ITU International Telecommunication Union
ITU-T ITU Telecommunications Standardization Sector

J
HWD_Abbr.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 xli


Acronyms and Abbreviations

K
kg kilogram (SI base unit of mass)
km kilometer (SI unit of length in the metric system)

L
LAD layer adjacency discovery
LAN Local Area Network
LC type of fiber-optic connector
LCD liquid crystal display
LDCC line digital communication channel
LEAF Large Effective Area Fiber
LED light emitting diode
LLP loss of link pulse
LOC Loss of clock
LOF Loss of frame
LOS Loss of signal

M
m meter (SI base unit of length in the metric system)
M3 Metric ISO screw thread of nominal size M3 (nominal diameter = 3.0 mm)
M3.5 Metric ISO screw thread of nominal size M3 (nominal diameter = 3.5 mm)
M4 Metric ISO screw thread of nominal size M4 (nominal diameter = 4.0 mm)
M6 Metric ISO screw thread of nominal size M6 (nominal diameter = 6.0 mm)
M6x12 Cap screw with M6 thread and threaded length of 12 mm
M6x16 Cap screw with M6 thread and threaded length of 16 mm
MAC Media Access Control
MAN metropolitan area network
max. maximum
Mbit/s megabits per second (a unit of data transfer rates equal to 1.000.000 bits per
second)
HWD_Abbr.fm

MEA mismatch equipment alarm

xlii FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


Acronyms and Abbreviations

mi mile, miles (a unit of length)


MIB management information base -> Glossary
min. minimum
mm millimeter (SI derived unit of length in the metric system)
mm2 square millimeter (unit of area, derived from the SI base unit of the meter)
MOD module
ms millisecond (SI unit of time which is one thousandth of a second)
µm micrometer or micron (SI unit of length in the metric system, equal to one
millionth of a meter, which is one-thousandth of a millimeter)
MSA Multi-Sourcing Agreement standard
MSP multiplexer section protection
MU/PC Type of fiber-optic connector with physical contact
MUX (1) multiplexer
(2) multiplexing
mV millivolt (SI derived unit of electric potential difference, equal to one thousandth
of a volt)
mW milliwatt (SI derived unit for measuring power, equal to one thousandth of a watt)

N
n.c. not connected
NAT network address translation
NCU Network Control Unit
NCU-A Network Element Control Unit; does not include RTU licence; supports CWDM and
access type channel modules only
NCU-B Network Element Control Unit, includes RTU licence; supports both CWDM and
DWDM using access and core type channel modules
NCU-GDPS Network Control Unit-Generic Data Package Service; includes RTU licence; supports
both CWDM and DWDM using access, core and enterprise type channel modules
NE network element
NEBS Network Equipment Building Standards
NEC United States National Electrical Code
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NEND near end
nm nanometer (SI derived unit of length in the metric system, equal to one billionth of
a meter)
NMS Network Management System
NP Network Planner
NPCUP Network Protected Client Unprotected Protection
NSAP network service access point
NTP Network Time Protocol
HWD_Abbr.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 xliii


Acronyms and Abbreviations

O
o/e optical to electrical conversion
OC-1 optical carrier level 1 (with 51.84 Mbit/s)
OC-12 optical carrier level 12 (with 622 Mbit/s)
OC-192 optical carrier level 192 (with 9.953 Gbit/s)
OC-3 optical carrier level 3 (with 155 Mbit/s)
OC-48 optical carrier level 48 (with 2.5 Gbit/s)
ODU optical channel data unit
ODU1 Optical Channel Data Unit (2.666 Gbit/s)
ODU2 Optical Channel Data Unit (10.7092 Gbit/s)
OPR optical power receive
OPT optical power transmit
OSA optical spectrum analyzer
OSC Optical Supervisory Channel
OSNR Optical Signal-to-Noise Ratio
OSCM Optical Supervisory Channel Module (collective name)
OSCM-V#1630 Optical Supervisory Channel Module with optical line monitoring and one optical
port; the pilot laser operates at a wavelength of 1630 nm
OSFM optical supervisory filter module (collective name)
OSFM#1630 Optical Supervisory Filter Module; the pilot laser operates at a wavelength of
1630 nm
OTH Optical Transport Hierarchy
OTN Open Transport Network
OTU1 Optical Channel Transport Unit 1 (2.666 Gbit/s)
OTU2 Optical Channel Transport Unit 2 (10.7092 Gbit/s)

P
PC personal computer
PCB Printed Circuit Board
PCS Physical Coding Sublayer
PDU (1) protocol data unit
(2) power distribution unit
PE (1) protective earth
(2) grounding conductor
PG protection group mode
HWD_Abbr.fm

PG-P protection group mode - protection traffic

xliv FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


Acronyms and Abbreviations

PG-W protection group mode - working traffic


Pin max maximum permissible optical input power at network port receiver
PM protection module (collective name)
PMD Polarization Mode Dispersion
ppm (oscillator) parts-per-million
PPP point-to-point protocol
PSCP PuTTY secure copy program
PSM-95/5 Power splitter module specifically designed for power monitoring and optical
spectrum analysis.
PSU power supply unit (collective name)
PSU/7HU-AC AC power supply unit for a 7HU Shelf
PSU/7HU-DC DC power supply unit for a 7HU Shelf

R
R receive
RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service
RAM random access memory
RFC Request For Comments
RI Ring Indicator (serial connection)
RJ Registered Jack (old Bell Labs acroynm)
RJ-45 Registered Jack-45 (8-pin connector used on Ethernet cables)
RLM remote line monitoring
RMA return materials authorization
RoHS Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous Substances in electrical and electronical
equipment
rpm revolutions per minute
RS Read Salomon
RS 232 Recommended Standard-232
RSA Rivest, Shamir and Adelman key encryption scheme
RSM Remote Switch Module (collective name)
RSM-OLM#1630 Remote Switch Module with optical line monitoring, the pilot laser of which
operates at a wavelength of 1630 nm
HWD_Abbr.fm

RSM-SF Single Fiber Remote Switch Module (collective name)

Document Version 7.1.5 xlv


Acronyms and Abbreviations

RSM-SF#1310 Single-Fiber Remote Switch Module working at 1310 nm


RSM-SF#1510 Single-Fiber Remote Switch Module working at 1510 nm
RTS Request To Send (serial connection)
Rx receiver
RX- negative receive data signal (pin assignments of twisted-pair Ethernet cables)
RX+ positive receive data signal (pin assignments of twisted-pair Ethernet cables)
RxD Received Data (serial connection)
RxESFail Rx elastic storage failure

S
s second (SI base unit of time)
Schuko Acronym for the German word Schutzkontakt. This means "Protective (earthed)
contact".
SCP secure copy program
SCU Shelf Control Unit
SCU-E Extension Shelf Control Unit
SD (1) signal detect
(2) signal degrade
SDCC section digital communication channel
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
sec. second (SI base unit of time)
Ser serial
SF single fiber
SFP Small Form-factor Pluggable Transceiver (collective name)
SFP/GBE/ELECTRICAL/RJ45 SFP Electrical GbE Transceiver
SFTP secure file transfer protocol
SFW Single-Fiber Working
SH1HU/2DC 1HU Shelf equipped with a DC power supply unit and dual power feeds
SH1HU-P/DCM rack-mountable, 1 HU high Dispersion Compensation Module Shelf (DCM Shelf)
SH7HU 7HU Shelf
SI International System of Units (abbreviated SI from the French Le Système
international d'unités)
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
SONET Synchronous Optical Network
SSH Secure Shell Protocol
SSMF Standard Single-Mode Fiber
STM-1 Synchronous Transfer Mode, Level 1 (150 Mbit/s)
STM-16 Synchronous Transfer Mode, Level 3 (2.5 Gbit/s)
STM-4 Synchronous Transfer Mode, Level 2 (622 Mbit/s)
HWD_Abbr.fm

STM-64 Synchronous Transfer Mode, Level 4

xlvi FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


Acronyms and Abbreviations

STP shielded twisted pair (Ethernet cable)


STP CAT 6 shielded twisted pair category 6 (copper cable type)
SUB D9 9 pins D-subminiature connector
SW Software

T
T transmit
TIA Telecommunications Industry Association
T568A Definition of pin/pair assignments for eight-conductor 100-ohm balanced twisted-
T568B pair cabling according to TIA/EIA-568-B

TCA Access Type TDM Channel Module


TCC Core Type TDM Channel Module
TCE Enterprise Type TDM Channel Module
TCM tandem correction monitoring
TCP transmission control protocol
TX+ positive transmit data signal (pin assignments of twisted-pair Ethernet cables)
TX- negative transmit data signal (pin assignments of twisted-pair Ethernet cables)
TDM Time Division Multiplexing
Telnet teletype network, a telecommunications protocol
TIA/EIA-568-B A set of three standards that address commercial building cabling for telecommuni-
cations products and services
TFTP trivial file transfer protocol
TWRS True Wave Reduced Slope Fiber
typ. typically
Tx transmitter
TxClkFail transmitter clock failure

U
UAS unassigned
UEQ unequipped
UK United Kingdom
Un rated voltage
U.L., UL Underwriter’s Laboratories Inc. (product safety testing and certification
organization, based in USA)
HWD_Abbr.fm

USB Universal Serial Bus (serial bus standard to interface devices)

Document Version 7.1.5 xlvii


Acronyms and Abbreviations

UTP unshielded twisted pair (Ethernet cable)


USB OTG USB on-the-go
UTC Universal Time Coordinated

V
V volts (SI base unit of electric potential difference or electromotive force)
VA volt-ampere (amount of apparent power in an alternating current)
V Bus USB power (in pinout of USB data cable)
VCAT Virtual Concatenation
VCC +5 V operating voltage
VCG virtual container group
VSM Versatile Switch Module, triggered by system software via backplane
VW-1 Vertical-Wire Flame Test (UL 1581)

W
W (1) width
(2) watt (SI derived unit of power – a term that refers to power produced as
electricity)
WAN wide area network
WCA WDM Channel Module Access Type
WCA-PC-10G-V Access Type 10G WDM Channel Module with client pluggable interface and
integrated very-long reach CWDM or DWDM network interface (collective name)
WCA-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx Access Type 10G WDM Channel Module with client pluggable interface and
integrated very-long reach CWDM network interface
WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx Access Type 10G WDM Channel Module with client pluggable interface and
integrated very-long reach DWDM network interface
WCA-PCN-2G5U Access Type 2.5G WDM Channel Module with a single client and dual network
pluggable interfaces
WCC Core Type WDM Channel Module
WCC-PC-10G-U#Dxx Core Type 10G WDM Channel Module with a client pluggable interface and
integrated ultra-long reach DWDM network interface; (#Dxx stands for a DWDM
channel.)
WCC-PC-10G-V Core Type 10G WDM Channel Module with client pluggable interface and integrated
very-long reach CWDM or DWDM network interface (collective name)
WCC-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx Core Type 10G WDM Channel Module with client pluggable interface and integrated
very-long reach CWDM network interface
WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx Core Type 10G WDM Channel Module with client pluggable interface and integrated
HWD_Abbr.fm

very-long reach DWDM network interface

xlviii FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


Acronyms and Abbreviations

WCC-PC1N-2G7U Core Type 2.7G WDM channel module with a pluggable client and network port.
Both ports are designed for the support of intra office, standard and long reach as
well for the support of CWDM long and very long reach and DWDM very long and
ultra-long reach
WCC-PC-2G7U-R Core Type 2.7G WDM channel module with a pluggable client interface and
integrated regional reach CWDM or DWDM network interface (collective name)
WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx Core Type 2.7G WDM channel module with a pluggable client interface and
integrated regional reach DWDM network interface; (#Dxx stands for a DWDM
channel.)
WCC-PC-2G7U-V#Cxxxx Core Type 2.7G WDM channel module with a pluggable client interface and
integrated very long reach CWDM network interface; (#Cxxxx stands for a CWDM
channel.)
WCC-PCTN-10G-LN#D01-32 Core type WDM channel module with pluggable interface on the client side and a
single tunable integrated long reach DWDM interface on the network side; maximum
client and network data rate of 11.0957 Gbit/s
WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32 Core type WDM channel module with pluggable interface on the client side and a
single tunable integrated very long reach DWDM interface on the network side;
maximum client and network data rate of 11.0957 Gbit/s
WCE Enterprise Type WDM Channel Module (collective name)
WCE-LS-T-V Enterprise Type Low-Speed Transparent WDM Channel Module for very-long reach
link distance (collective name)
WCE-LS-T-V#Cxxxx Enterprise Type Low-Speed Transparent WDM Channel Module with an integrated
1310-nm multimode interface on the client side and an integrated very-long reach
CWDM interface on the network side
WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx Enterprise Type Low-Speed Transparent WDM Channel Module with an integrated
1310-nm multimode interface on the client side and an integrated very-long reach
DWDM interface on the network side
WDM Wavelength Division Multiplexing
WEEE waste electrical and electronic equipment

X
XFP Extended Form-factor Pluggable transceiver (collective name)
XON/XOFF Software data flow communications protocol for controlling the flow of data
between computers and other devices. X stands for transmitter. This is frequently
referred to as "software flow control".
xTCA x-port Access Type TDM Channel Module (x stands for number of client ports)
xTCC x-port Core Type TDM Channel Module (x stands for number of client ports)
xTCE x-port Enterprise Type TDM Channel Module (x stands for number of client ports)
HWD_Abbr.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 xlix


Acronyms and Abbreviations

HWD_Abbr.fm

l FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


Chapter 0
Introduction
This chapter gives an overview of the Fiber Service Platform 3000R7 (FSP
3000R7) basic system structure and provides information about equip-
ment disposal.

Basic System FSP 3000R7 is a high-performance WDM networking system for bidirec-
Structure tional transmission of optical signals. These signals are transmitted in a
defined number of channels over a single fiber pair or one duplex fiber.
The system uses a modular structure which enables a flexible upgrade of
capacity and functionality according to network requirements.
The FSP 3000R7 is comprised of various types of shelves and modules.
Each type performs different functions within the system. The hardware
components are grouped as follows:
• Shelves with accessories
• 7HU Shelf, DC or AC powered (SH7HU)
• DC power supply unit (PSU/7HU-DC) for a 7HU Shelf
• AC power supply unit (PSU/7HU-AC) for a 7HU Shelf
• Plug-in fan unit (FAN/Plug-In) for a 7HU Shelf
• 1HU Shelf, DC powered (SH1HU/2DC)
• DCM Shelf (SH1HU-P/DCM)
• Core type channel modules
• WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32
• WCC-PC-10G-U#Dxx
• WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx
• WCC-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx
• 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#D01-32
• 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx
• 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Cxxxx
• WCC-PC1N-2G7U
• WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx
• WCC-PC-2G7U-V#Cxxxx
• 4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5
• Access type channel modules
• WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx
• WCA-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx
• 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx
HWD_0_Intro.fm

• 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Cxxxx
• 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx

FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description Document Version 7.1.5 0-1


Hardware Description

• 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-L#Cxxxx
• WCA-PCN-2G5U
• 2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5
• 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx
• 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Cxxxx
• Enterprise type channel modules
• 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx
• 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Cxxxx
• WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx
• WCE-LS-T-V#Cxxxx
• Pluggable transceivers
• Various Small Form-factor Pluggable Transceivers (SFP
transceivers) used for transmission speeds below 10 Gbit/s
• Various Extended Form-factor Pluggable Transceivers (XFP
transceivers) used for transmission speeds of around 10 Gbit/s
• Management, supervision and optical protection switch modules
• Network Element Control Unit (NCU)
• Shelf Control Unit (SCU)
• Extension Shelf Control Unit (SCU-E)
• Optical Supervisory Channel Module with optical line monitoring
and one optical port (OSCM-V#1630)
• Optical Supervisory Channel Module with optical line monitoring
and two optical ports (2OSCM-V#1630)
• Versatile Switch Module (VSM)
• Remote Switch Module with optical line monitoring (RSM-
OLM#1630)
• Single-Fiber Remote Switch Module working at 1310 nm (RSM-
SF#1310)
• Single-Fiber Remote Switch Module working at 1510 nm (RSM-
SF#1510
• Optical filter modules
• C-Band/L-Band Splitter (2CLSM-#D01-#D64)
• Band Splitter Modules (BSMs)
• 2-port Red/Blue Splitter for C- or L-band (2BSM-#Dxx-#Dyy)
• CWDM Band Splitter Module for 8 channels (2ABSM-#C1470-
#C1610)
• CWDM Band Splitter Module for 8 channels and 1310-nm
connectivity (3BSM-#G1310-#C1610)
• Group Splitter Modules (GSMs)
• 8-port Group Splitter for C- or L-band (8GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy)
Two discrete module variants are available.
• 4-port Group Splitter for C- or L-band (4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy)
4 discrete module variants are available.
• 1-Group Splitter Modules for C- or L-band (1GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy)
16 discrete module variants are available.
HWD_0_Intro.fm

• Channel Splitter Modules (CSMs)

0-2 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


Introduction

• 40-port MUX/DMX Channel Splitter for C- or L-band


(40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy)
Two discrete module variants are available.
• CWDM 4-Channel Splitter Module for #C1470, #1490, #1590,
#C1610 (4CSM-#C1470-#C1610)
• CWDM 4-Channel Splitter Module for #C1510, #1530, #1550,
#C1570 (4CSM-#C1510-#C1570)
• CWDM Single Channel Splitter Module (1CSM+#Cxxxx)
8 variants are available.
• CWDM Single Channel Splitter Module with 1310-nm
connectivity (1CSM+#G1310)
• East/West CWDM Single Channel Splitter Module
(1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W)
The module is available in 8 variants, one for each of the 8
CWDM wavelengths it supports.
• East/West DWDM Single Channel Splitter Module
(1CSM+#Dxx-E/W)
The module is available in 64 variants, one for each of the
64 DWDM wavelengths it supports.
• Optical Supervisory Filter Module (OSFM+#1630)
• Optical Power Splitter Modules
• Power Splitter Module 95/5 (PSM 95/5)
• Protection Modules
- Single-port Protection Module Single Mode (1PM/SM)
- 2-port Protection Module Single Mode (2PM/SM)
- Single-port Protection Module Multimode (1PM/MM)
- 2-port Protection Module Multimode(2PM/MM)
• Optical amplifiers
• EDFA-C-S10 (group-based C-Band EDFA Module, fixed power)
• EDFA-L-S10 (group-based L-Band EDFA Module, fixed power)
• EDFA-L-D17-GC (full L-Band EDFA Module, gain controlled)
• EDFA-C-S18-GC (full C-Band EDFA Module, gain controlled)
• EDFA-C-D20-GC (full C-Band EDFA Module, gain controlled)
• Dispersion compensation modules (DCMs)
• Dispersion Compensation Module Plug-In 20km (DCM-P/20)
• Dispersion Compensation Module Plug-In 40km (DCM-P/40)
• Dispersion Compensation Module Plug-In 80km (DCM-P/80)
• Dispersion Compensating Fiber Module (DCF-M/xxx/yyyy)
• Dispersion Compensation with Fiber-Bragg-Gratings module
(DCG-M/xxx/SSMF)
• Dummy modules
A general description of the modules mentioned above are provided in the
following chapters. These descriptions provide the user with a complete
understanding of how the individual components work without getting
too far into technical details. For all matters relating to detailed product
description, system management, installation, troubleshooting and safe-
ty, refer to the appropriate documents. See the Preface, Section “Related
HWD_0_Intro.fm

Documentation”, p. 2-xxii.

Document Version 7.1.5 0-3


Hardware Description

Equipment Disposal FSP 3000R7 equipment that has effectively reached the end of its life
must be collected separately for electronic waste recycling or for disposal
of in an environmentally friendly way. It is recommend to hand obsolete
or unused equipment over to an appropriate disposal facility.

The whole system or individual modules that becomes waste must never
Notice be disposed of with the normal trash. The final disposal of these products
should be handled in accordance with all relevant national laws and
regulations concerning waste electrical and electronic equipment.

Batteries Fully charged or partially discharged lithium batteries are hazardous


waste, if simply thrown away.

Used lithium batteries must never be disposed of by throwing them in the


Notice normal trash can or in fire. Dispose of the NCU module’s discrete lithium
battery promptly according to the instructions! Comply with the relevant
regulations on battery disposal of your country.

Dispose of the NCU module’s RAM IC according to the IC manufacturer‘s


Notice instructions!

Pluggable Pluggable transceivers are manufactured with materials considered to be


Transceivers hazardous. They are an environmental risk, if simply thrown away. Obso-
lete pluggable transceivers should be treated as electronic waste prod-
ucts.

Obsolete pluggable transceivers must never be disposed of by throwing


Notice them in the normal trash can. Dispose of pluggable transceivers in
accordance with the corresponding national laws and regulations on
waste electrical and electronic equipment.
HWD_0_Intro.fm

0-4 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


Chapter 1
Shelves and Components
This chapter provides the descriptions of the various shelves, the power
supplies and the fan unit.
This chapter includes the following sections:
1.1 SH7HU Shelf which describes the 7HU Shelf including the power sup-
ply options, module cooling, module slots and basic configuration. Infor-
mation on shelf naming, labeling and accessories is also provided.
1.2 PSU/7HU-DC which describes the DC power supply unit for the
7HU Shelf in detail.
1.3 PSU/7HU-AC which describes the AC power supply unit for the
7HU Shelf in detail.
1.4 FAN/Plug-In which describes the fan unit required for the operation
of the 7HU Shelf. The description provides details on how the fans work
and refers to the various LED indicators which the unit has. Information
about the shelf display and labeling of the unit is also included.
1.5 SH1HU/2DC Shelf which describes the DC-powered 1HU Shelf includ-
ing the integrated power supply, module cooling system, module slots,
basic configuration and the shelf display. Also included is information on
the various LED indicators, shelf naming, labeling and adaptor brackets
for rack-mounting.
1.6 SH1HU-P/DCM Shelf which describes the DCM Shelf.
HWD_1_Mec.fm

FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description Document Version 7.1.5 1-1


Hardware Description

1.1 SH7HU Shelf


Bracket NCU Dummy module Fan unit (FAN/Plug-In) Bracket

SCU Power supply unit Air intake Fiber tray Air filter unit Power supply unit
Fig. 1-1: SH7HU Front View

Description The SH7HU (7HU Shelf) is a rack-mountable, 7 HU-high housing which in-
cludes the entire FSP 3000R7 system and the accessories (dummy mod-
ules, adaptor brackets, front cover).
22 vertical slots each 4 HP wide are arranged in the middle of the shelf,
into which the standard FSP 3000R7 modules are plugged in. The slots oc-
cupy 5 HU space. The remaining 2 HU of the shelf are occupied by the fan
unit above the slots and the air filter unit below the slots. The front view
of an SH7HU is illustrated in Figure 1-1. The fiber finger set is not shown.
The basic configuration is: one power supply unit, one Shelf Control Unit
(SCU), the fan unit and the air filter unit fitted. Optical modules and man-
agement modules may be pre-installed according to the system configu-
ration ordered. The backplane provides electrical connections for power
supply and intra-shelf communication. Internal backplane connectors and
tracks hold the modules in position. The SH7HU-R supports hot-swapping
of the modules. This allows for maximum flexibility when planning for up-
grades or reconfigurations. Actual configurations can be viewed and mon-
itored using the management software.
HWD_1_Mec.fm

1-2 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


SH7HU Shelf

Features • Modular extensible design, based on the 19” format


• Dimensions: width x height x depth
483 mm x 311 mm x 275 mm; (19.00 in x 12.25 in x 9.50 in)
• Robust, low-profile housing made from alloyed steel sheet
• Surface condition: uncoated
• Single/dual universal AC (100 to 240 V AC, 400 VA) or DC (-36 to
-72 V DC, 400 W) power supply options
• Front power access
• Heat dissipation using ventilation (front-to-rear airflow)
• High-density racking for optical modules
• Access to all components from the front of the shelf
• Front fiber routing using the fiber finger set
• Status indicators for the module slots, fans and network element on
the front panel of the fan unit
• Shelf display
• Slot configuration without tooling

Power Supply The SH7HU may optionally be powered by hot-swap AC or DC power supply
units (PSU/7HU-ACs or PSU/7HU-DCs). Power is available from the front
side of the shelf. For power redundancy, two independent power supply
units of the same type connected to separate power sources are needed.
In this case, both units supply the required power to the shelf in a load-
sharing mode. If one of the two units fails the remaining unit will take
over the power supply for the entire shelf until a unit swap has been ex-
ecuted. A Mix of AC and DC power supply units per shelf is supported.

Pay attention that the total power consumption of a fully populated shelf
Caution does not exceed the specified value (see FSP 3000R7 Module and System
Specification). Otherwise power redundancy cannot be guaranteed or
power supply may even fail.

For details on the power supplies, see Section 1.3 “PSU/7HU-AC and
Section 1.5 “SH1HU/2DC Shelf.

Grounding There are various grounding connectors on the right-hand side of the
shelf for making a functional earth connection. See Figure 1-2.

6.3 mm blade connector


male type
HWD_1_Mec.fm

Fig. 1-2: Shelf’s Earthing (Grounding) Connectors (Functional Earth)

Document Version 7.1.5 1-3


Hardware Description

An earthing kit is delivered with the shelf. For details, see Appendix A.1.3
“Earthing Kit”.

Module Cooling The fan unit (FAN/Plug-In) sufficiently dissipates the heat produced by
the modules. Air is drawn by the fans via the air intake and air filter pad
at the bottom of the shelf, up through the module slots, and exhausted
via the air outlet at the top of the rear panel. The air filter pad is included
with the air filter unit. It is located beneath the module slots. For details
on the fan unit, see Section 1.4 “FAN/Plug-In.

Never operate the shelf without having an air filter pad fitted in the air
Caution filter unit. By ignoring this, dirt can block the air inlets and outlets.
Blocked air inlets and outlets lead to inefficient cooling and considerable
increase in fire risk.

A dirty air filter pad negatively influences cooling efficiency. Therefore it


must be inspected regularly and replaced, if necessary.

A dirty air filter pad negatively influences cooling efficiency. Taking air
pollution into consideration, replace dirty air filter pads at least once a
year. ADVA strongly recommends replacing the air filter pad every 90
days.

Slots 5 HU high slots are numbered from 1 through 20. These slots accommo-
date all 5 HU FSP 3000R7 modules including the power supply units. Near-
ly any combination of modules is accepted. Double-width modules occupy
two slots. Preferred configuration of such modules is to start at an odd
slot number (1,2; 3,4; 5,6; etc.). Channel modules working in a protection
group for channel module protection do not need to be placed in neigh-
boring slots.
The two slots most left are of half-size height and named A and B. These
slots are intended for the management modules.

The 7HU Shelf must never be operated with open or empty slots. Slots not
Caution in use must be filled with dummy modules to maintain proper cooling for
all other modules. When adding modules later on, store the dummy
modules in a safe place for future use.

Fiber Tray To prevent mechanical stress from the optical fibers there is a horizontal
fiber tray to hold them. It is located along the lower front edge of the
shelf. The perforated part of the fiber tray serves as air inlet for cooling
the modules.
HWD_1_Mec.fm

1-4 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


SH7HU Shelf

Fiber Finger Set The fiber finger set is assembled above the perforated part of the fiber
tray as shown in Figure 1-3. The assembly includes a plurality of fiber fin-
gers. Each interspace between two fingers can be used for routing and re-
taining the optical fiber jumpers to be connected to the corresponding
optical module.

Fiber tray Fiber finger


Fig. 1-3: Fiber Finger Set

Signal Transmission The modules including the fan unit can be monitored and controlled by
Path the SCU or SCU-E. Each module is connected to the internal bus of the
backplane enabling data exchange with the management modules. The
only official access to the shelf is through the NCU of the NE.

Placement The 7HU Shelf can be placed in a 19-inch, ETSI or NEBS complaint rack by
using the appropriate adaptor brackets. It also fits into a 300 mm
(0.984 ft.) deep ETSI rack. The shelf occupies 7 HU of space in an rack.

Status LED Various LED indicators provide a quick visual check of the operating sta-
Indicators tus of the modules, fans and network element. The LED indicators are lo-
cated on the front panel of the fan unit. For more information, see Section
1.4 “FAN/Plug-In and Troubleshooting Guide, Chapter 3.

Accessories

Adaptor Brackets Separate adaptor brackets are available for rack mounting:
• 2 x 19-inch rackmount brackets
• 2 x 21-inch ETSI brackets
• 2 x 23-inch NEBS brackets
• 1 x ESD connection adaptor
The SH7HU comes with 19-inch rackmount brackets pre-installed. The
ETSI and NEBS bracket pairs as well as the ESD connection adaptor are in-
cluded in the shipping box. The ESD connection adaptor must be mounted
to the bracket.

Dummy Modules Dummy modules are delivered with the shelf when not fully populated
with optical modules. For more information, refer to Chapter 10.

Front Cover The front cover is placed in front of the shelf as shown in Figure 1-4, p.
1-6. It protects the fiber optic connectors of the modules against external
influences and prevents the fibers from being pulled out inadvertently.
The operating status of the shelf can still be observed and the air filter
pad can be replaced when the cover is attached. The cover is attached to
HWD_1_Mec.fm

the shelf by means of the latches and fixing brackets on either side.

Document Version 7.1.5 1-5


Hardware Description

Latch

Fig. 1-4: Front Cover Attached to the SH7HU

Shelf Naming Depending on configuration, a 7HU Shelf is referred to as:


• master shelf, if it is equipped with a NCU and a SCU
• main shelf, if it is equipped with a SCU only
• extension shelf if it is equipped with a SCU-E only
Apart from management modules, a master shelf and a main shelf hold all
active modules such as channel modules, optical amplifiers and optical
switch modules as well as optical filter modules.
In addition to the SCU-E, an extension shelf only includes passive optical
modules and protection modules.

Labeling Each SH7HU can be identified by several labels located on its rear panel.
See Figure 1-5, p. 1-6.

Shelf type label

Certification label

Shelf supply values


label

Fig. 1-5: Labeling the SH7HU

Shelf Type Label The shelf type label contains following relevant information of the shelf:
• type and version
• serial number and bar code
• item number and bar code
Figure 1-6, p. 1-7 shows an example.
HWD_1_Mec.fm

1-6 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


SH7HU Shelf

Item Number:

Maerzenquelle 1–3 xxxxxxxxxxxxx


98617 Meiningen

SH7HU&SCU

Version:
0.2

Serial Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxx

Fig. 1-6: Example of an SH7HU Shelf Type Label

Certification Label The certification label provides current certification marks. Figure 1-7
shows an example.
Warning: nnova

This is a Class A product!

In a domestic environment
this product may cause radio
interference in which case ITE
the user may be required Equipment
to take adequate measures. E174175

Approvals are only valid, if all modules and/or blind panels are in place.
This product complies with FDA Raditation Performance Standard
21 CFR Subpart J.
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to
Laser Notice No. 50, dated July 26, 2001.

Fig. 1-7: Example of an SH7HU Certification Label

Shelf Supply Values The shelf supply values label provides:


Label • shelf name
• important operating data of the shelf
• instructions for power supply
Figure 1-8 shows an example.
Type: FSP 3000-R7-7HU
Voltage: 100 V to 240 V AC Power Supply
-36 V to -72 V DC Power Supply

Power Consumption 400 VA

For proper selection of power supply cord


refer to instruction manual.
Always remove both
power cords when
Made in Germany disconnecting from
02.02.2006 power source !

Fig. 1-8: Example of an SH7HU Shelf Supply Values Label

ESD and Laser Safety The ESD and laser safety labels are located on the front at the bottom
Label right on the air filter unit, as shown in Figure 1-9.
HWD_1_Mec.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 1-7


Hardware Description

Fig. 1-9: Example of the ESD and Laser Safety Label

Specifications For technical details, refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Specifica-
tion.

HWD_1_Mec.fm

1-8 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


PSU/7HU-DC

1.2 PSU/7HU-DC
Variants:
PSU-DC Module name
none
S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx
Serial number

Status LED indicator

Terminal block with transparent


plastic cover (protective cover)

Mounting screw

Screw terminals:
- protective ground
- negative pole marked with -
- positive pole marked with +

Mounting screw

Item number
P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx

Fig. 1-10: PSU/7HU-DC Front View

Description The PSU/7HU-DC is a two-slot, plug-in DC power supply unit specifically


designed for an 7HU Shelf. For power feeding, the power supply unit has
a terminal block on its faceplate. It is mounted to the faceplate with the
upper and lower screws as shown in Figure 1-10. To protect service per-
sonnel from bodily harm always keep the protective cover fitted on the
terminal block. When connected to a user-supplied power source the PSU/
7HU-DC transforms a higher DC input voltage received from a user-sup-
plied power source into a lower DC output voltage of the same polarity.
The unit delivers 12.2 V DC at 33.5 A to each module through the back-
plane connectors. The unit produces at most 408 W of power. Two PSU/
7HU-DCs working in load sharing mode can be installed to provide power
redundancy. In this case, both power supply units must be of identical
type and should receive DC power from separate circuits. If one unit fails,
the remaining unit is capable of powering a fully loaded shelf (408 W) on
an ongoing basis until the fault is cleared.
The power supply unit is field-replaceable.
HWD_1_Mec.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 1-9


Hardware Description

Features • Rugged electrical and mechanical design


• Nominal voltage: -48 V DC (positive conductor of the power source
is connected to earth)
• Service voltage range: from -36 V DC to -72 V DC
• Usable in fully-redundant configuration
• Inverse-polarity protection
• Status LED indicator for power
• Front accessible
• Hot-swappable

Fuses Electrical security is provided by two double pole fuses that are fitted in-
side the power supply unit. The fuse links are not accessible. If a fuse link
has blown, the power supply unit must be replaced by service personnel
and returned for manufacturer repair.

Risk of hazardous voltage!


WARNING Do not open the power supply unit under any circumstances!
There are no serviceable parts inside. A faulty unit should be
returned to ADVA AG Optical Networking for repair.

EMC The PSU/7HU-DC has special EMC contact strips attached to it, which cre-
ates a tight seal with neighboring modules.

Risk of electromagnetic disturbances!


Caution Make sure that the EMC contact strips are not damaged before inserting
the unit. Defective EMC contact strip must be replaced immediately.
Otherwise EMC compliance cannot be achieved.

Connecting

Risk of electric shock or burns!


WARNING The protective grounding terminal must be used for altitudes above
2000 m (1.24 mi.) and for voltages equal or greater than 60 V.

If the site is located more than 2000 m above sea level or if a 60-V DC
power source is to be connected, the unit must be grounded properly. In
this case a 3-core power supply cable must be used. The protective ground
terminal (PE) allows the user to connect the power supply unit to a sys-
tem safety ground lead. This avoids injury in the event of an electric
shock.
Power connections should be made using ADVA’s DC power cables. For de-
tails, see Appendix A.1.2 “DC Power Cords”, p. A-5 and Installation Guide,
HWD_1_Mec.fm

Chapter 4, Section 4.7.2 “Connecting DC Power”, p. 4-13.

1-10 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


PSU/7HU-DC

Even though the PSU/7HU-DC is protected against reverse polarity, pay


attention to polarity when connecting the power cord. If the polarity has
not been considered, the unit will not work. The power LED is off.

Removing and Modular, front access design and hot-swap capability allow for quick and
Replacing easy replacement in the case of failure.

Risk of remaining voltage!


WARNING Make sure that no voltage is left at the defective power supply
unit. Before removing the PSU/7HU-DC from the shelf, switch off
the DC power source which is connected to the unit. Then
disconnect the associated DC power cable from the terminal block
and wait for at least 30 seconds. After that, the unit can be pulled
out of the slots.

A potential risk of injury from electric shock exists when the power supply
unit is removed from the shelf. Voltage may still be present inside the
PSU/7HU-DC, even though the unit already has been disconnected from
the power source. To avoid the risk of electric shock, allow any residual
electric charge in the unit to dissipate. After switching off the associated
DC power source, it will take at least 30 seconds to de-energize the unit
completely. After that, the unit can be pulled out of the shelf.

Monitoring The output voltage and output current are continually monitored by the
SCU. An alarm is generated if the output voltage falls below a definite
limit. Failure or removal of the power supply unit from the shelf is report-
ed to the network management system. The power supply unit can also
be supervised via the LED indicator on its faceplate.

Placement The PSU/7HU-DC is 8 HP wide and therefore occupies two regular slots.
It can be placed in any 5 HU slot of the 7HU Shelf. ADVA recommends
installing the units in the slots 1+2 and 19+20.

LED Indicator The PSU/7HU-DC has a single two-color LED indicator labeled "P" on the
faceplate. Its colors represent different operating states. For details, refer
to the Troubleshooting Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.2.2 ‚ p. 3-11.

Specifications For technical details, refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Specifica-
tion.
HWD_1_Mec.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 1-11


Hardware Description

1.3 PSU/7HU-AC
Variants:
PSU-AC Module name
none
S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx
Serial number

Status LED indicator

100-240V AC
50/60Hz

AC Appliance Inlet, male connector


according to IEC 320-C14

Item number
P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx

Fig. 1-11: PSU/7HU-AC Front View

Description The PSU/7HU-AC is a two-slot, plug-in, AC power supply unit specifically


designed for an 7HU Shelf. For power feeding, the power supply unit has
an AC appliance coupler on its faceplate. When connected to the mains,
the PSU/7HU-AC converts AC into DC needed for powering the shelf’s
modules. The unit automatically detects the input voltage within the
specified range. No adjustment is necessary. The PSU/7HU-AC delivers
12.2 V DC at 33.5 A to each module through the backplane connectors.
The unit produces approximately 400 VA of power. Two PSU/7HU-ACs
working in load sharing mode can be installed to provide power redun-
dancy. In this case, both power supply units must be of identical type and
should receive AC power from separate circuits. If one unit fails, the re-
maining unit is capable of powering a fully loaded shelf (ca. 400 VA) on
an ongoing basis until the fault is cleared.
The power supply unit is field-replaceable.

Features • Rugged electrical and mechanical design


• Autoranging from 100 to 240 V AC at 50 - 60 Hz
• Usable in fully-redundant configuration
HWD_1_Mec.fm

• Status LED indicator for power

1-12 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


PSU/7HU-AC

• Front accessible
• Hot-swappable

Fuses Electrical security is provided by two double pole fuses that are fitted in-
side the power supply unit. The fuse links are not accessible. If a fuse link
has blown, the power supply unit must be replaced by service personnel
and returned for manufacturer repair.

Risk of hazardous voltage!


WARNING Do not open the power supply unit under any circumstances!
There are no serviceable parts inside. A faulty unit should be
returned to ADVA AG Optical Networking for repair.

EMC The PSU/7HU-AC has special EMC contact strips attached to it, which cre-
ates a tight seal with neighboring modules.

Risk of electromagnetic disturbances!


Caution Make sure that the EMC contact strips are not damaged before inserting
the unit. Defective EMC contact strip must be replaced immediately.
Otherwise EMC compliance cannot be achieved.

Connecting To avoid injury in the event of an electric shock the unit must be properly
grounded. Therefore, power connections should be made using ADVA’s AC
power cables only. For details, see Appendix A.1.1 “AC Power Cords”,
p. A-2 and Installation Guide, Chapter 4, Section 4.7.3 “Connecting AC
Power”, p. 4-20.

Removing and Modular, front access design and hot-swap capability allow for quick and
Replacing easy replacement in the case of failure.

Risk of remaining voltage!


WARNING Make sure that no voltage is left at the defective power supply
unit. After disconnecting the associated AC power cord from the
appliance coupler, wait for at least 30 seconds, before removing
the unit from the shelf.

A potential risk of injury from electric shock exists when the power supply
unit is removed from the shelf. Voltage may still be present inside the
PSU/7HU-AC, even though the unit already has been disconnected from
the mains supply. To avoid the risk of electric shock, allow any residual
electric charge in the unit to dissipate. After unplugging the power cord
from the appliance coupler, it will take at least 30 seconds to de-energize
the unit completely. After that, the unit can be pulled out of the shelf.
HWD_1_Mec.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 1-13


Hardware Description

Monitoring The output voltage and output current are continually monitored by the
SCU. An alarm is regenerated if the output voltage falls below a definite
limit. Failure or removal of the power supply unit from the shelf is report-
ed to the network management system. The power supply can also be su-
pervised via the LED indicator on its faceplate.

Placement The PSU/7HU-AC is 8 HP wide and therefore occupies two regular slots.
It can be placed in any 5 HU slot of the 7HU Shelf. ADVA recommends
installing the units in the slots 1+2 and 19+20.

LED Indicator The PSU/7HU-AC has a single two-color LED indicator labeled "P" on the
faceplate. Its colors represent different operating states. For details, refer
to the Troubleshooting Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.2.1 ‚ p. 3-10.

Specifications For technical details, refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Specifica-
tion.

HWD_1_Mec.fm

1-14 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


FAN/Plug-In

1.4 FAN/Plug-In
Status LEDs for Network element LCD Arrow Enter Fan status
slots A and B status LEDs display buttons button LED

Fiber Service Platform


A fan
B

Status LEDs for slots 1 through 20


Fig. 1-12: FAN/Plug-In Front View

Description The FAN/Plug-In (plug-in fan unit) is an integral part of a 7HU Shelf. It
is located above the module slots. The fan unit is used for the forced air
cooling of the modules. The front view is illustrated in Figure 1-12. The
complete fan unit is shown in Figure 1-13, p. 1-17.
The three fans are powered via the backplane connector. Under normal
ambient conditions all fans work independently at a low rotational speed.
The shelf’s internal air temperature controls the rotational speed of the
fans.
The Fan Control Unit (FCU) continually monitors the status of each fan
and reports the status to the Shelf Control Unit (SCU). The status of the
fans can also be read from the fan LED indicator and the shelf display on
the front panel.
When one of the fans fails, one minute after fan failure the intact fans
increase their rotational speed to the maximum in order to compensate
for the capacity of the broken fan. In this case, the fan LED turns yellow,
but no alarm is raised. If yet another fan fails, the fan LED lights up red
and an alarm is raised.

The failure of a single fan does not does not endanger the cooling of the
modules in the shelf. However, the whole fan unit should be replaced by
Service Personnel within 48 hours after fan failure.

(1) If only one fan is working, there will not be sufficient cooling. In this
Caution case, in order to protect the modules from damage, the shelf must not
be allowed to continue operation.
(2) The use of an air filter pad is absolutely necessary to prevent dust
and debris from accumulating on the air inlets and outlets as well as from
entering the shelf. Blocked air inlets and outlets lead to inefficient
cooling and considerable increase in fire risk.
HWD_1_Mec.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 1-15


Hardware Description

Features • Designed as a plug-in unit for a 7HU Shelf


• Equipped with three non-detachable powerful fans
• Includes the shelf display
• Provides the status indicators for the shelf, the fans and all module
slots
• Hot-swappable
• Field-replaceable
• Front accessible

Signal Transmission The fan unit is connected to the internal bus of the shelf’s backplane en-
Paths abling data exchange with the SCU.

Placement The fan unit can be placed into any 7HU Shelf.

Status LED The fan unit has numerous two-color LED indicators that provide a quick
Indicators visual check of the operating states of the fans, installed modules and
network element (NE). The LED indicators are arranged in three groups on
the front panel as shown in Figure 1-12, p. 1-15. Each LED indicator has
dedicated colors to be able to indicate different faults.

Fan Status LED There is only one LED labeled “fan” for the three cooling fans. If more
than one fault appears, it will indicate the fault with the highest severity.
For details, refer to the Troubleshooting Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.1.2‚
p. 3-3.

Slot Status LEDs There is one status LED per slot. The LEDs for the 5 HU slots are numbered
from 1 through 20 (with the respective slot number). The two status LEDs
labeled “A” and “B” are intended for the half-sized slots. Only the failure
on the module with the highest severity will be indicated by the respec-
tive slot status LED (according to the corresponding ARC configuration).
For details, refer to the Troubleshooting Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.1.3‚
p. 3-4.

Network Element The LEDs labeled “critical”, “major” and “minor” indicate different net-
Status LEDs work element alarms. Within the network element, only the failure with
the highest severity will be indicated. Therefore only one of the three LEDs
is lit at a time. For details, refer to the Troubleshooting Guide, Chapter 3,
Section 3.1.4‚ p. 3-8.

The alarm status of a network element is only indicated by the master


shelf. The network element status LEDs of the remaining shelves within
Note the network element will be off.

Shelf Display The shelf display (LCD) on the front panel (see Figure 1-12, p. 1-15) indi-
cates the shelf ID number (unique within an NE). The arrow buttons and
the enter button are used to set the shelf ID and the LED test. They are
also used to read the rotational speeds of the individual fans and to see
whether the manual setting of the shelf ID is locked using management
HWD_1_Mec.fm

software (by a small lock in the lower right corner).

1-16 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


FAN/Plug-In

Labeling The FAN/Plug-In can be identified by two labels located on the top of the
unit. See Figure 1-13.
Manufacturer’s label Bar code label Fan unit type label

Fig. 1-13: Labeling the Fan Unit

Fan Unit Type Label The fan unit type label contains the official name, unique serial number
and device code. Figure 1-14 shows an example.
Fan/Plug-In Name

Device code
0042700001-2.00
NA70063705700 Serial number
Fig. 1-14: Example of a Fan Unit Type Label

Bar Code Label The bar code label contains the fan unit’s bar code and the corresponding
serial number. Figure 1-15 shows an example.

NA70063705700
Fig. 1-15: Example of a Fan Unit Bar Code Label

Specifications For technical details, refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Specifica-
tion.
HWD_1_Mec.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 1-17


Hardware Description

1.5 SH1HU/2DC Shelf


Bracket Front panel NCU (slot A) Dummy module (slot 2) Bracket

-
pwr1

-
pwr2

Terminal block Shelf display SCU (slot B) Dummy module (slot 1) ESD jack
Fig. 1-16: SH1HU/2DC Front View

Description The SH1HU/2DC (1HU Shelf) is a rack-mountable, 1 HU-high, DC-powered


shelf. The shelf is the housing which holds the entire FSP 3000R7 system.
The internal power supply is integrated on the left side. Six individual
fans ensure the effective cooling of the modules.
The shelf features four horizontal slots which accommodate the standard
FSP 3000R7 modules. The separate ESD jack, rightmost on the front side
of the shelf, is intended for the connection of a wrist strap. The front view
of the SH1HU/2DC is illustrated in Figure 1-16. The complete shelf is
shown in Figure 1-19, p. 1-22.
The SH1HU/2DC is specifically designed for low channel count installa-
tions, single services and feeder applications. This shelf may also be used
for single channel add/drop in a CWDM ring (one channel module, one
east/west optical filter module). The basic configuration is: 1 x Network
Element Control Unit (NCU-B) and 1 x Shelf Control Unit (SCU). Optical
modules and management modules may be pre-installed according to the
system configuration ordered.
The backplane provides electrical connections for power supply and intra-
shelf communication. Internal backplane connectors and tracks hold the
modules in position. The SH1HU/2DC supports hot-swapping of the mod-
ules. This allows for maximum flexibility when planning for upgrades or
reconfigurations. Actual configurations can be viewed and monitored us-
ing the management software.

Features • Modular extensible design, based on the 19” format


• Dimensions: width x height x depth
483 mm x 44 mm x 275 mm; (19.00 in x 1.73 in x 10.83 in)
• Robust, low-profile housing made from alloyed steel sheet
• Surface condition: uncoated
• Built-in DC power supply with dual power feeds (-40.5 V to -57 V DC,
120 W)
• Front power access
• Heat dissipation using ventilation (airflow from the right-hand side
to the left-hand side)
• Access to all modules from the front of the shelf
• Front fiber routing
• Status indicators for the module slots, fans and network element on
HWD_1_Mec.fm

the front panel

1-18 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


SH1HU/2DC Shelf

• Shelf display
• Slot configuration without tooling

Power supply Power is available from the front side of the shelf using a terminal block
(block barrier type connectors) with 4 screw terminals and plastic covers
over the terminals.
The power supply transforms a higher DC input voltage received from a
user-supplied power source into a lower DC output voltage of the same
polarity. The unit delivers 12 V DC at 10 A to each module through the
backplane connectors. The maximum power consumption is 160 W.
Power redundancy is achieved by two separate inputs (labeled pwr 1 and
pwr 2 on the front panel). In this case, power should be received from
two independent power sources. If one of the two power feeds fails, the
power supply will continue to provide the required power to the shelf un-
til the fault is cleared.
Output voltage and output current are continually monitored by the SCU.
An alarm is generated if the input voltage and output voltage falls below
a definite limit. The power supply can also be supervised via LED indica-
tors on the front side. The power supply unit is not field-replaceable.

Grounding There are various grounding connectors on the left-hand side of the shelf
for making a functional earth connection. See Figure 1-17.

Earth (ground) terminal

Earth (ground) screws

Fig. 1-17: Shelf’s Earthing (Grounding) Connectors (Functional Earth)

An earthing kit is delivered with the shelf. For details, see Appendix A.1.3
“Earthing Kit”.

Module Cooling Inside the shelf each side wall has three fans for ventilation. Because the
fans are arranged on opposing sides, a good flow of air results within the
shelf. The six fans operate independently. The shelf internal air temper-
ature controls the rotational speed of all fans. Under normal ambient con-
ditions, they simultaneously work at a low rotational speed. The Fan
Control Unit (FCU) continually monitors the status of each fan and reports
the status to the Shelf Control Unit (SCU). The status of the fans can also
be read from the fan LED indicator and the shelf display on the front pan-
el.
If a single fan fails, one minute after fan failure the intact fans increase
their rotational speed to the maximum in order to compensate for the ca-
pacity of the broken fan. In this case, the fan LED turns yellow, but no
alarm is raised. If two or more fans fail, the fan LED lights up red and an
alarm is raised.
HWD_1_Mec.fm

The fans are not field-replaceable.

Document Version 7.1.5 1-19


Hardware Description

The failure of a single fan does not does not endanger the cooling of the
modules in the shelf.
However, the whole shelf should be replaced by Service Personnel
within 48 hours after fan failure.

Air is drawn in through the air intake located at right side of the shelf,
passed directly across the modules and exhausted through the air outlets
located at the left side of the shelf.

Slots The slots numbered 1 (lower) and 2 (upper) are 4 HP wide and 5 HU high.
They are intended for accommodation of all FSP 3000R7 optical modules.
Nearly any combination of modules is accepted. Double-width modules
occupy both slots. The two slots marked A and B are of half size height
and predetermined for the FSP 3000R7 management modules. Slot A holds
the Network Element Control Unit (NCU), and slot B accommodates the
Shelf Control Unit (SCU or SCU-E).

The SH1HU/2DC must never be operated with open or empty slots. Slots
Caution not in use must be filled with dummy modules to maintain proper cooling
for all other modules. When adding modules later on, store the dummy
modules in a safe place for future use.

Signal Transmission The modules can be monitored and controlled by the SCU or SCU-E. Each
Path module is connected to the internal bus of the backplane enabling data
exchange with the management modules. The only official external access
to the shelf is through the NCU of the NE.

Placement The SH1HU/2DC can be placed in a 19-inch, ETSI or NEBS compliant rack
by using the appropriate adaptor brackets. It also fits into a 300 mm deep
ETSI rack. The shelf only occupies 1 HU of space in an rack.

Status LED The SH1HU/2DC has two-color LED indicators that provide a quick visual
Indicators check of the operating states of the fans, installed modules and network
element (NE). The LED indicators are arranged in four groups on the front
panel as shown in Figure 1-18.

Power status LEDs LCD display Arrow buttons

Network element
status LEDs

Fan status LED Slot status LEDs Enter buttons


Fig. 1-18: Front Panel of the SH1HU/2DC
HWD_1_Mec.fm

1-20 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


SH1HU/2DC Shelf

Each LED has dedicated colors to be able to indicate different faults.

Fan Status LED There is only one LED labeled “fan” for the six cooling fans. Should appear
more than one fault, it will indicate the fault with the highest severity.
For details, refer to the Troubleshooting Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.1.2‚
p. 3-3.

Slot Status LEDs The shelf has one status LED indicator per slot. The LEDs for the 5 HU slots
are labeled “1” and “2” (with the respective slot number). The LEDs for
the half-sized slots are labeled “A” and “B”. Only the failure on the mod-
ule with the highest severity will be indicated by the respective slot sta-
tus LED (according to the corresponding ARC configuration). For details,
refer to the Troubleshooting Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.1.3‚ p. 3-4.

Network Element The LEDs labeled “critical”, “major” and “minor” (see Figure 1-18, p. 1-20)
Status LEDs indicate different network element alarms. Within the network element,
only the failure with the highest severity will be indicated. Therefore only
one of the three LEDs is lit at a time. For details, refer to the Troubleshoot-
ing Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.1.4‚ p. 3-8.

The alarm status of a network element is only displayed by the master


shelf. The respective LEDs of the remaining shelves within the network
element will be off.

Power Status LEDs The power status LEDs labeled “pwr1” and “pwr2” (see Figure 1-18, p. 1-
20) indicate different states of the power supply unit. For details, refer
to the Troubleshooting Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.2.3‚ p. 3-13.

Shelf Display The shelf display (LCD) on the front panel (see Figure 1-18, p. 1-20) indi-
cates the shelf ID number (unique within a NE). The arrow buttons and
the enter button are used to set the shelf ID and the LED test. They are
also used to read the rotational speeds of the individual fans and to see
whether the manual setting of the shelf ID is locked using management
software (by a small lock in the lower right corner).

Adaptor Brackets Separate adaptor brackets are available for rack mounting:
• 2 x 19-inch rackmount brackets
• 2 x 21-inch ETSI brackets
• 2 x 23-inch NEBS brackets
The SH1HU/2DC comes with 19-inch rackmount brackets pre-installed.
The ETSI and NEBS bracket pairs are included in the shipping box.

Dummy Modules Dummy modules are delivered with the shelf when not fully populated
with optical modules. For more information, refer to Chapter 10.

Shelf naming Depending on configuration, a SH1HU/2DC is referred to as


• master shelf, if it is equipped with a NCU and a SCU
• main shelf, if it is equipped with a SCU only
HWD_1_Mec.fm

• extension shelf, if it is equipped with a SCU-E only.

Document Version 7.1.5 1-21


Hardware Description

Apart from management modules, a master shelf and a main shelf hold all
active modules such as channel modules, optical filter modules, optical
amplifiers as well as optical switch modules.
In addition to the SCU-E, an extension shelf only includes passive optical
modules and protection modules.

Shelf Labeling Each SH1HU/2DC can be identified by several labels located on the top of
the shelf. See Figure 1-19.
Shelf type label Shelf supply values label

Certification label
Fig. 1-19: Labeling the SH1HU/2DC

Shelf Type Label The shelf type label contains the following relevant information:
• name, type and version
• serial number and bar code
• item number and bar code
Figure 1-20 shows an example.

Item Number:

Maerzenquelle 1–3 xxxxxxxxxxxxx


98617 Meiningen

SH1HU/2DC&SCU

Version:
0.2

Serial Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxx

Fig. 1-20: Example of a SH1HU/2DC Shelf Type Label

Certification Label The certification label indicates the current certification marks for this
shelf. Figure 1-21, p. 1-22 shows an example.
Warning: nnova

This is a Class A product!

In a domestic environment
this product may cause radio
interference in which case ITE
the user may be required Equipment
to take adequate measures. E174175

Approvals are only valid, if all modules and/or blind panels are in place.
This product complies with FDA Raditation Performance Standard
21 CFR Subpart J.
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to
Laser Notice No. 50, dated July 26, 2001.
HWD_1_Mec.fm

Fig. 1-21: Example of a SH1HU/2DC Certification Label

1-22 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


SH1HU/2DC Shelf

Shelf supply values The shelf supply values label provides:


label • the shelf name
• important operating data of the shelf
• instructions for power supply
Figure 1-22, p. 1-23 shows an example.
Type: FSP 3000-R7-1HU
Voltage: -48 V DC
Current: max. 3 A

Power Consumption 120 W

For proper selection of power supply cord


refer to instruction manual.
Always remove both
power cords when
Made in Germany disconnecting from
02.02.2006 power source !

Fig. 1-22: Example of a SH1HU/2DC Shelf Supply Values Label

ESD and Laser Safety The ESD and laser safety label is delivered with the shelf. Figure 1-23
Label shows the label.

Fig. 1-23: ESD and Laser Safety Label

This label must be affixed to a conspicuous place on the rack as exempli-


fied in Figure 1-24, p. 1-23.
ESD and laser safety labels

Fig. 1-24: Example of Placing the ESD and Laser Safety Label on the Rack

Specifications For technical details, refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Specifica-
tion.
HWD_1_Mec.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 1-23


Hardware Description

1.6 SH1HU-P/DCM Shelf


Certification Label Shelf Type Label

Bracket Blank panels Bracket


Fig. 1-25: SH1HU-P/DCM Front View

Description The SH1HU-P/DCM (DCM Shelf) is a rack-mountable, 1 HU high housing.


It features two horizontal slots covered by front panels. The shelf is
shipped with two front panels mounted. See Figure 1-25 for an illustration
of an SH1HU-P/DCM.
The shelf can accommodate two DCMs side-by-side to function bidirec-
tionally (from west to east and from east to west) or unidirectionally (cas-
cade connection to extend the compensation length). The term DCM
always refers to DCM-P/20, DCM-P/40 and DCM-P/80.
The front view of the SH1HU-P/DCM, with two DCM-P/40 modules in-
stalled, is shown in Figure 1-26.

Fig. 1-26: SH1HU-P/DCM Equipped with Two DCM-P/40s (Cascade Connection)

If only one DCM is plugged into a shelf slot, the empty slot must be cov-
ered by a blank panel. In this way the optical connectors inside the DCM
are protected from dirt.
Features • Modular extensible design, based on the 19” format
• Dimensions: width x height x depth
483 mm x 44 mm x 270 mm; (19.00 in x 1.73 in x 10.63 in)
• Robust, low-profile housing made from alloyed steel sheet
• Surface condition: uncoated
• Access to the modules from the front of the shelf
HWD_1_Mec.fm

• Front fiber routing

1-24 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


SH1HU-P/DCM Shelf

Adaptor Brackets Separate adaptor brackets are available for rack mounting:
• 2 x 19-inch rackmount brackets
• 2 x 21-inch ETSI brackets
• 2 x 23-inch NEBS brackets
The SH1HU-P/DCM comes with 19-inch rackmount brackets pre-installed.
The ETSI and NEBS bracket pairs are included in the shipping box. If the
shelf is to be mounted into an ETSI or NEBS compliant rack, the ETSI or
the NEBS bracket pair must be fitted on the outside of the left-hand and
right-hand side walls. The procedures for removing and fitting the differ-
ent adaptor brackets are described in the Installation Guide.

Placement The SH1HU-P/DCM can be placed in a 19-inch, ETSI or NEBS compliant


rack by using the appropriate adaptor brackets. It also fits into a 300 mm
(0.984 ft.) deep ETSI rack. The shelf only occupies 1 HU of space in a rack.

Due to its greater depth, the SH1HU-P/DCM has always to be mounted in


the lowest position in the case of cabinet mounting, so that the air flow
in the cabinet is not inhibited.
When placing the SH1HU-P/DCM beneath a 7HU Shelf, ensure that there
Note
is at least 1 HU of space between the bottom of a 7HU Shelf and the top
of the SH1HU-P/DCM to allow a free flow of air to the 7HU Shelf above.

Labeling the Shelf Each SH1HU-P/DCM can be identified by several labels located on the top
of the shelf. See Figure 1-25, p. 1-24.

Shelf Type Label The shelf type label identifies the following relevant information about
the shelf:
• name, type and version
• serial number and bar code
• item number and bar code
Figure 1-27 shows an example.
Item Number:

Maerzenquelle 1–3 xxxxxxxxxxxxx


98617 Meiningen

SH1HU/DCM

Version:
0.2

Serial Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxx

Fig. 1-27: Example of a SH1HU-P/DCM Shelf Type Label


HWD_1_Mec.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 1-25


Hardware Description

Certification Label The certification label provides current certification marks. Figure 1-28,
p. 1-26 shows an example.
Warning: nnova

This is a Class A product!

In a domestic environment
this product may cause radio
interference in which case ITE
the user may be required Equipment
to take adequate measures. E174175

Approvals are only valid, if all modules and/or blind panels are in place.
This product complies with FDA Raditation Performance Standard
21 CFR Subpart J.
Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to
Laser Notice No. 50, dated July 26, 2001.

Fig. 1-28: Example of a SH1HU-P/DCM Certification Label

Specifications For technical details, refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Specifica-
tion.

HWD_1_Mec.fm

1-26 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


Chapter 2
Core Type Channel Modules
This chapter contains the descriptions of all core type channel modules
available at the publication date of this Hardware Description.
Each description includes the front view of the module, the explanation
of the ports, the simplified block diagram and module specific details.
Moreover, the module’s key features are presented, the signal path within
the module is briefly discussed, and an example of the module’s labeling
are given.
For all matters relating to module management, installation, trouble-
shooting and safety, refer to the Detailed Procedures, Detailed System De-
scription, User Guide, Installation Guide and Safety Guide.

This chapter includes the following module descriptions:


2.1 WCC-PC-10G-U#Dxx
2.2 WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32
2.3 WCC-PCTN-10G-LN#D01-32
2.4 WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx
2.5 WCC-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx
2.6 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#D01-32
2.7 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx
2.8 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Cxxxx
2.9 WCC-PC1N-2G7U
2.10 WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx
2.11 WCC-PC-2G7U-V#Cxxxx
2.12 4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description Document Version 7.1.5 2-1


Hardware Description

Identification Core type channel modules are identified by faceplate codes and the label
printed on the board cover. Identification information is provided in each
module description.

Naming The module name is made up of a set of parts assembled according to a


Conventions very specific rule as exemplified below. The parts of the name represent
the module’s specific features.
Example:
4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#D10

Integrated network interface type: DWDM


transmission distance - very long reach
DWDM channel no. 10
Network port data rate: 10 Gbit/s
Max. Client port data rate: 2.7 Gbit/s
Pluggable interface(s): pluggable client interfaces
Channel module type: Core type TDM channel module
Number of client ports: 4
This example describes a core type 4-port TDM channel module with four
pluggable client interfaces supporting a maximum client data rate of
2.7 Gbit/s. The aggregated data rate on the network port runs at
10 Gbit/s. The module features an integrated very-long reach DWDM in-
terface for channel no. 10.
Table 2-1, p. 2-2 lists the naming conventions used by the FSP 3000R7.

Table 2-1: Core Type Channel Module Naming Convention


Parts of the Name Code Meaning
Number of client x x = 2: 2-port TDM channel module
ports (only TDM x = 4: 4-port TDM channel module
channel modules
x = 8: 8-port TDM channel module
Channel module WCC Core type WDM channel module
type TCC Core type TDM channel module
Low speed
low-speed transparent channel module with fixed client
transparent at fixed LS
and network interface (s)
interface(s)
Pluggable PC Pluggable client interface(s)
interface(s)
(if applicable) PCN Pluggable client interface(s) and network interface(s)

Pluggable Pluggable client interface(s) and one pluggable network


PC1N
interface(s) interface
Pluggable and
tunable Pluggable client interface(s) and tunable network
PCTN
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

interface(s) interface(s)
(if applicable)

2-2 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


Table 2-1: Core Type Channel Module Naming Convention
Parts of the Name Code Meaning
Maximum client 10G Depending on the module type: e.g. 9.9532 Gbit/s,
port data rates 10.3125 Gbit/s, 10.51875 Gbit/s, 10.7092 Gbit/s,
11.0957 Gbit/s
2G1U Depending on the module type: e.g. 1.0625 Gbit/s,
1.250 Gbit/s and 2.125 Gbit/s (unspecific)
2G5 2.488320 Gbit/s
2G7 2.666057 Gbit/s
2G7U Depending on the module type: e.g. 2.666057 Gbit/s,
155.52 Mbit/s, 622.08 Mbit/s, 200 Mbit/s, 1.250
Gbit/s, 1.0625 Gbit/s, 2.125 Gbit/s (unspecific)
Network port data 2G5 2.488320 Gbit/s
rates 10G Depending on the module type: e.g. 10.7092 Gbit/s,
11.0032 Gbit/s
Integrated network interface type (if applicable):
transmission R regional reach link distances (240 km – 360 km)
distances U ultra-long reach link distances (120 km – 240 km)
V very-long reach link distances (70 km – 120 km)
L long reach link distance (30 km - 70 km)
WDM channel #Dxx DWDM channel (xx stands for channel 01 to 64),
#DCx DWDM C band intermediate channel (x stands for 1 - 9),
#DLx DWDM L band intermediate channel (x stands for 1 - 9)
according to FSP DWDM wavelength table
#Cxxxx CWDM channel 1470, 1490, 1510, 1530, 1550, 1570
1590, 1610 according to FSP CWDM wavelength table

General WCCs and xTCCs are performance-optimized for use in metro-core net-
works. These modules support a set of SDH/Sonet and OTH features, such
as digital performance monitoring, G.709 standard conform mapping/
framing, Forward Error Corrections (FEC), error forwarding and in-band
DCN management. Depending on their network interfaces, the core type
channel modules are capable of transmitting services over link distances
in the 70 km to 360 km range without using 3R devices or Dispersion Com-
pensating Fiber (DCF). WCCs and xTCCs are hot swappable and customer
installable. This enables a scalable, in-service expansion at any time.
Module Design Core type channel modules are designed as single-slot or two-slot plug-
in modules that are compatible with any 7HU Shelf (SH7HU) or 1HU Shelf
(SH1HU). The modules fully conform to the requirements of all relevant
SDH ITU-T and SONET ANSI/Telcordia standards.
The receptacles of the integrated interfaces and the cages for the plug-
gable transceivers are angled at 45° to preserve minimum fiber bend radii
when connecting the optical cables. The SFP/XFP design allows in-service
configuration on an as-needed basis without affecting other active ports.
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 2-3


Hardware Description

Core type channel modules have special EMC contact strips attached to
them, which creates a tight seal with neighboring modules. The EMC con-
tact strips avoid unintended propagation of electromagnetic energy to-
wards the external environment that might disrupt other equipment.
Module Handling WCCs and xTCCs are electrostatic sensitive modules. Therefore they must
be handled with care. For information on module handling, refer to the
Detailed Procedures.
Module Variants Core type channel modules with integrated network interfaces are avail-
able in CWDM and DWDM variants.

Management and Using the Network Element Control Unit (NCU), all core type channel
Operating Status modules are SNMP manageable and fully supported through the Network
Management System (NMS). Management allows user access to module
conditions as well as network status. The status of receivers and trans-
mitters can either be read off the faceplate LED indicators or observed
with SNMP-based network management tools. Commands for controlling
and status query are transmitted via the internal system bus between the
channel modules and the NCU.

Faceplate Markings All FSP 3000R7 core type channel modules have the same faceplate mark-
ings. LED indicator and optical port markings of the individual modules
are explained in the appropriate module descriptions.

LED Indicators All core type channel modules have tri-color LED indicators that are visi-
ble through the faceplates. Their colors display different operating states.
The status that each color of the LED indicators represents is described in
the Troubleshooting Guide.

Labeling Core type channel modules have several printed labels (module type label,
certification label and warranty label) on the board cover, which contain
specific module information. The labels of the individual modules are
shown in the appropriate module descriptions.

Module Type Label This label contains module information, such as


• the name of the module
• the module type
• the serial number and its bar code
• the item number and its bar code
• technical specifications (channel number, output power range,
receiver dynamic range, wavelength and supported data rates of the
module)

Certification Label This label provides approved certification marks.

Warranty Label Damage or removal of the warranty label will void the warranty.
ADVA AG Optical Networking will disclaim the implied warranty of mer-
chantability.
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

2-4 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


WCC-PC-10G-U#Dxx

2.1 WCC-PC-10G-U#Dxx
Variants:
WCC-PC-10G
U#D01
Module name WCC-PC-10G-U#D01
S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx Serial number to
Status LED indicators WCC-PC-10G-U#D64

WCC-PC-10G-U#DC1
Receiver connector (N-R) for network signal input
to
Transmitter connector (N-T) for network signal
output WCC-PC-10G-U#DC9

WCC-PC-10G-U#DL1
to
Transmitter connector (C-T) for client signal
output WCC-PC-10G-U#DL9
Receiver connector (C-R) for client signal input

Item number

P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx

Fig. 2-1: WCC-PC-10G-U#Dxx Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 2-2 lists all abbreviations on the WCC-PC-10G-U#Dxx faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 2-2: WCC-PC-10G-U#Dxx Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
P module’s power supply status T transmit
Mod module’s operating states R receive
C operating states of the client port C client port
N operating states of the network port N network port
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 2-5


Hardware Description

Description The WCC-PC-10G-U#Dxx is a core type 10G WDM channel module with a
pluggable client interface. It is specifically designed for the use in DWDM
transport systems. The module converts client optical signals into 10 Gbit
network signals with a specific wavelength in the ITU-T grid and vice ver-
sa.
The WCC-PC-10G-U#Dxx is intended for transport of OTU2, OTU2-LAN, SDH
STM-64, SONET OC-192, 10 GbE LAN PHY, 10GbE WAN PHY and 10G FC ser-
vices. All supported services can be transmitted in transparent mode.
The module is available in 80 variants, one for each of the 80 FSP 3000R7
DWDM channels it supports.
The WCC-PC-10G-U#Dxx can be used as a unidirectional inline regenerator
or as a regenerator in back-to-back configuration.
The module provides performance monitoring of standard SDH STM-64,
SONET OC-192c, OTU2, 10G FC and 10 GbE-LAN signals on the client as
well as network port. For all applications with the exception of 10G FC,
standard FEC according to ITU-T G.709 can be enabled at both the client
port and the network port. Enhanced FEC with higher coding gain is only
supported on the network port. 10G FC can only be transmitted without
FEC. OTN section layer protection switching is supported.

Features • OTU mapping according to ITU-T G.709


• Channel card protection
• Versatile switched protection (in conjunction with the RSM-SF, RSM-
OLM and VSM)
• ALS according to ADVA standard on client and network ports
• ALS according to ITU on client ports
• Clock and data recovery with 3R signal conditioning
• Comprehensive Fault and Performance monitoring of line and
services
• Facility and terminal loop back for client and network ports
Client interface • Extended Form-factor Pluggable (XFP) MSA compliant interface
characteristics using LC connectors for fiber termination
• Data rates in the range from 9.9532 Gbit/s to 11.0957 Gbit/s
• Support of 850 nm intra-office reach, 1310 nm standard reach and
1550 nm long reach

850 nm types XFP/10G/850I/MM/LC


1310 nm types XFP/10G/1310S/SM/LC
XFP/11G/1310S/SM/LC
1550 nm types XFP/10G/1550L/SM/LC
XFP/11G/1550L/SM/LC

Network interface • integrated, ultra-long reach DWDM interface (100 GHz wavelength
characteristics grid)
• Data rates in the range from 9.9532 Gbit/s to 11.0957 Gbit/s
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

• LC receptacles

2-6 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


WCC-PC-10G-U#Dxx

XFP transceivers XFP cages should only be populated with ADVA-approved XFP transceivers.
If you use non-ADVA approved XFPs in conjunction with channel modules,
ADVA cannot guarantee the behavior of the module. When the client in-
terface is not used, the corresponding XFP cage does not need to be pop-
ulated with an XFP transceiver.

Signal Path Figure 2-15 shows the functional block diagram (very simplified) and il-
lustrates the signal path, which is described below.

WCC-PC-10G-U#Dxx Overhead Termination/


Performance Monitoring
Rx STM-64/OC-192 Tx
C-R o OTU2/DW OTU2/DW e N-T
10 GbE (MAC)
e FEC FEC/EFEC o
PCS 64B/66B
850/1310 nm
XFP transceiver
STM-64/OC-192
o OTU2/DW OTU2/DW e
10 GbE (MAC)
C-T e FEC FEC/EFEC o N-R
Client Tx PCS 64B/66B Rx Network
port C port N
Transmit direction
Receive direction

Fig. 2-2: WCC-PC-10G-U#Dxx Functional Block Diagram (Simplified)

Transmit direction In the transmit direction, the following takes place:


The client port receiver (Rx) receives the optical signal through the C-R
connector from the CPE. This signal is converted to the electrical domain
and clock and data recovery is performed. The regenerated signal is op-
tionally mapped into a G.709 compliant frame structure. Overhead pro-
cessing as well as ingress and egress client data performance monitoring
are carried out. When operating in the OTU2 mode, standard FEC on the
client port and enhanced FEC on the network port are accomplished. The
transmitter (Tx) converts the electrical output signal back to an optical
signal at a specific DWDM wavelength and transmits it through the N-T
connector onto the link.

Receive direction In the receive direction, the following takes place:


The network port receiver (Rx) receives the signal at a specific DWDM
wavelength through the N-R connector from the link. This signal is con-
verted to the electrical domain, and data and clock recovery is performed.
If an OTN signal is received, it is de-mapped from the G.709 compliant
frame and EFEC/FEC functions are carried out. Overhead processing and
client data performance monitoring are performed. The resulting signal is
then routed to the client port transmitter (Tx). The transmitter converts
the electrical signal back to an optical one and transmits it through the
client port connector C-T to the CPE.

Placement The WCC-PC-10G-U#Dxx is 4 HP wide. It can be placed in any 5 HU slot of


the 7HU Shelf and the appropriate slots of the 1HU Shelf.
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

LED Indicators Different LED indicators provide a quick visual check of the operating sta-
tus of the module and its ports. For details, refer to the Troubleshooting
Guide, Chapter 3”, p. 3-1.

Document Version 7.1.5 2-7


Hardware Description

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 2-3, Figure 2-4 and Figure 2-5.

Module Type Label


Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
WCC-PC-10G-U
#D01
Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Output Power Range: +0.5 to +3.5 dBm XFP xxxxxxxxxxxx
Receiver Dynamic Range: -22 to -8 dBm XFP
Wavelength: 1529.55 nm/SM /
Support Data Rate [Gbit/s]: 9.9532, 9.9532,
10.3125 10.3125
10.51875, 10.51875,
10.6642, 10.6642,
10.7092, 10.7092,
11.0491, 11.0491,
11.0957 11.0957
Laser Module

Fig. 2-3: Example of a WCC-PC-10G-U#Dxx Module Type Label

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 2-4: Example of a WCC-PC-10G-U#Dxx Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 2-5: Example of a WCC-PC-10G-U#Dxx Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

2-8 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32

2.2 WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32
Variants:
Module name none
Serial number
Status LED indicators

Receiver connector (N-R) for network signal input


Transmitter connector (N-T) for network signal
output

Transmitter connector (C-T) for client signal


output
Receiver connector (C-R) for client signal input

Item number

Fig. 2-6: WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32 Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 2-3 lists all abbreviations on the WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32 faceplate
and their meanings.
Table 2-3: WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32 Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
P module’s power supply status T transmit
Mod module’s operating states R receive
C operating states of the client port C client port
N operating states of the network port N network port

Description The WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32 is a core type 10G WDM channel module


HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

specifically designed for the use in DWDM transport systems with very-
long distance transmission. The module has an Extended Form-factor
Pluggable (XFP) MSA compliant interface on the client side.

Document Version 7.1.5 2-9


Hardware Description

On the network side, it features an integrated 10 Gbit, very-long reach,


100 GHz-spaced tunable DWDM interface.
The module converts one optical client signal into one 10 Gbit/s network
signal. The network port is fully tunable from channel #D01 up to channel
#D32, including #DC1 to #DC9, in a wavelength grid of 100 GHz. Each
channel can be tuned in the system management by using the NE man-
agement tools. See the User Guide.
The WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32 is intended for transport of OTU2, SDH STM-
64, SONET OC-192, 10 GbE LAN PHY, 10GbE WAN PHY and 10G FC services
in the C band of the DWDM transport system. All applications can be
transmitted in transparent mode.
The WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32 can be used as a unidirectional inline re-
generator or as a regenerator in back-to-back configuration.
The module provides performance monitoring of standard SDH STM-64,
SONET OC-192c, OTU2, 10G FC and 10 GbE-LAN signals on the client as
well as network port. For all applications with the exception of 10G FC,
standard FEC according to ITU-T G.709 can be enabled at both the client
port and the network port. Enhanced FEC with higher coding gain is only
supported on the network port. 10G FC can only be transmitted without
FEC. OTN section layer protection switching is supported.

Features • OTU mapping according to ITU-T G.709


• Channel card protection
• Versatile switched protection (in conjunction with the RSM-SF,
RSM-OLM and VSM)
• ALS according to ADVA standard on client and network ports
• ALS according to ITU on client ports
• Clock and data recovery with 3R signal conditioning
• Comprehensive Fault and Performance monitoring of line and
services
• Facility and terminal loop back for client and network ports
• Client interface characteristics
• Extended Form-factor Pluggable (XFP) MSA compliant interface using
LC connectors for fiber termination
• Data rates in the range from 9.9532 Gbit/s to 11.0957 Gbit/s
• Support of 850 nm intra-office reach, 1310 nm standard reach and
1550 nm long reach
850 nm types XFP/10G/850I/MM/LC
1310 nm types XFP/10G/1310S/SM/LC
XFP/11G/1310S/SM/LC
1550 nm types XFP/10G/1550L/SM/LC
XFP/11G/1550L/SM/LC

Network interface • integrated, very-long reach tunable DWDM interface


characteristics (100 GHz wavelength grid)
• Data rates in the range from 9.9532 Gbit/s to 11.0957 Gbit/s
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

• LC receptacles

2-10 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32

XFP transceivers XFP cages should only be populated with ADVA-approved XFP transceivers.
If you use non-ADVA approved XFPs in conjunction with channel modules,
ADVA cannot guarantee the behavior of the module. When the client in-
terface is not used, the corresponding XFP cage does not need to be pop-
ulated with an XFP transceiver.

Signal Path Figure 2-7 shows the functional block diagram (very simplified) and illus-
trates the signal path, which is described below.

WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32 Overhead Termination/ Tunable


Performance Monitoring interface
Rx STM-64/OC-192 Tx
C-R o OTU2/DW OTU2/DW e N-T
10 GbE (MAC)
e FEC FEC/EFEC o
PCS 64B/66B
850/1310 nm
XFP transceiver
STM-64/OC-192
o OTU2/DW OTU2/DW e
10 GbE (MAC)
C-T e FEC FEC/EFEC o N-R
Client Tx PCS 64B/66B Rx Network
port C port N
Transmit direction
Receive direction

Fig. 2-7: WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32 Functional Block Diagram (Simplified)

Transmit direction In the transmit direction, the following takes place:


The receiver (Rx) of the client port receives the client signal at a non-
WDM wavelength from the CPE through the C-R connector. The input sig-
nal is converted to the electrical domain and a clock and data recovery
circuit performs full 3R signal regeneration at any selected data rate.
The regenerated signal is optionally mapped into a G.709 compliant frame
structure. Overhead processing as well as ingress and egress client data
performance monitoring are performed. When operating in the OTU2
mode, the module carries out standard FEC on the client port and en-
hanced FEC on the network port. The transmitter (Tx) converts the output
signal back to an optical signal and transmits any C band channel through
the N-T connector to the far end of the link.

Receive direction In the receive direction, the following takes place:


The receiver (Rx) of the network port receives any C band channel through
the N-R connector from the link. The input signal is converted to the
electrical domain and regenerated (3R function). If an OTN signal is re-
ceived, it is de-mapped from the G.709 compliant frame and EFEC/FEC
functions are carried out. Overhead processing and client data perfor-
mance monitoring are performed. The resulting signal is then routed to
the transmitter (Tx) of the client port. The transmitter converts the elec-
trical signal back to an optical one and transmits it at a non-WDM wave-
length through the connector C-T to the CPE.

Placement The WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32 is 4 HP wide. It can be placed in any 5 HU


slot of the 7HU Shelf and the appropriate slots of the 1HU Shelf.
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

LED Indicators Different LED indicators provide a quick visual check of the operating sta-
tus of the module and its ports. For details, refer to the Troubleshooting
Guide, Chapter 3”, p. 3-1.

Document Version 7.1.5 2-11


Hardware Description

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 2-8, Figure 2-9 and Figure 2-10.

Module Type Label


Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
WCC-PCTN-10G-V
#D01-32 Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Output Power Range: +3 to +6 dBm XFP xxxxxxxxxxxx
Receiver Dynamic Range: -22 to -8 dBm XFP
Wavelength: D01-D32/DC1-DC9 /
Support Data Rate [Gbit/s]: 9.9532, 9.9532,
10.3125 10.3125
10.51875, 10.51875,
10.6642, 10.6642,
10.7092, 10.7092,
11.0491, 11.0491,
11.0957 11.0957
Laser Module

Fig. 2-8: Example of a WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32 Module Type Label

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 2-9: Example of a WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32 Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 2-10: Example of a WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32 Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

2-12 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


WCC-PCTN-10G-LN#D01-32

2.3 WCC-PCTN-10G-LN#D01-32
The WCC-PCTN-10G-LN#D01-32 is a core type 10G channel module specif-
ically designed for the use in DWDM transport systems and long distance
transmission. It has the same design and functionality as the WCC-PCTN-
10G-V#D01-32. Therefore, the description in Section 2.2 “WCC-PCTN-10G-
V#D01-32”, p. 2-9 adequately applies to the WCC-PCTN-10G-LN#D01-32.
The WCC-PCTN-10G-V#D01-32 and the WCC-PCTN-10G-LN#D01-32 differ
only in their distance transmission and technical details of the network
port like the dispersion load, dispersion penalty, transmitter output pow-
er, receiver dynamic range and extinction ratio.
It provides a high extinction ratio and thus it is suitable for links with a
high amount of amplifiers and low OSNR.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 2-11, Figure 2-12 and Figure 2-13.

Module Type Label


Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
WCC-PCTN-10G-V
#D01-32 Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Output Power Range: +3 to +6 dBm XFP xxxxxxxxxxxx
Receiver Dynamic Range: -22 to -8 dBm XFP
Wavelength: D01-D32/DC1-DC9 /
Support Data Rate [Gbit/s]: 9.9532, 9.9532,
10.3125 10.3125
10.51875, 10.51875,
10.6642, 10.6642,
10.7092, 10.7092,
11.0491, 11.0491,
11.0957 11.0957
Laser Module

Fig. 2-11: Example of a WCC-PCTN-10G-LN#D01-32 Module Type Label

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

Fig. 2-12: Example of a WCC-PCTN-10G-LN#D01-32 Certification Label

Document Version 7.1.5 2-13


Hardware Description

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 2-13: Example of a WCC-PCTN-10G-LN#D01-32 Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.

HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

2-14 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx

2.4 WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx
Variants:
Module name WCC-PC-10G-V#D01
Serial number to
Status LED indicators WCC-PC-10G-V#D64

WCC-PC-10G-V#DC1
Receiver connector (N-R) for network signal input
to
Transmitter connector (N-T) for network signal
output WCC-PC-10G-V#DC9

WCC-PC-10G-V#DL1
to
Transmitter connector (C-T) for client signal
output WCC-PC-10G-V#DL9
Receiver connector (C-R) for client signal input

Item number

Fig. 2-14: WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 2-4 lists all abbreviations on the WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 2-4: WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
P module’s power supply status T transmit
Mod module’s operating states R receive
C operating states of the client port C client port
N operating states of the network port N network port

Description The WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx is a core type 10G WDM channel module specifi-
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

cally designed for the use in DWDM transport systems with very-long dis-
tance transmission. The module has an Extended Form-factor Pluggable
(XFP) MSA compliant interface on the client side.

Document Version 7.1.5 2-15


Hardware Description

On the network side, it features an integrated 10 Gbit, very-long reach,


100 GHz-spaced DWDM interface. The module is available in 80 variants,
one for each of the 80 FSP 3000R7 DWDM channels it supports.
The WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx is intended for transport of OTU2, SDH STM-64,
SONET OC-192, 10 GbE LAN PHY, 10GbE WAN PHY and 10G FC services over
a specific ITU-T compliant wavelength between the ingress and egress
node. All applications can be transmitted in transparent mode.
The WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx can be used as a unidirectional inline regenerator
or as a regenerator in back-to-back configuration.
The module provides performance monitoring of standard SDH STM-64,
SONET OC-192c, OTU2, 10G FC and 10 GbE-LAN signals on the client as
well as network port. For all applications with the exception of 10G FC,
standard FEC according to ITU-T G.709 can be enabled at both the client
port and the network port. Enhanced FEC with higher coding gain is only
supported on the network port. 10G FC can only be transmitted without
FEC. OTN section layer protection switching is supported.

Features • OTU mapping according to ITU-T G.709


• Channel card protection
• Versatile switched protection (in conjunction with the RSM-SF, RSM-
OLM and VSM)
• ALS according to ADVA standard on client and network ports
• ALS according to ITU on client ports
• Clock and data recovery with 3R signal conditioning
• Comprehensive Fault and Performance monitoring of line and
services
• Facility and terminal loop back for client and network ports

Client interface • Extended Form-factor Pluggable (XFP) MSA compliant interface


characteristics using LC connectors for fiber termination
• Data rates in the range from 9.9532 Gbit/s to 11.0957 Gbit/s
• Support of 850 nm intra-office reach, 1310 nm standard reach and
1550 nm long reach

850 nm types XFP/10G/850I/MM/LC


1310 nm types XFP/10G/1310S/SM/LC
XFP/11G/1310S/SM/LC
1550 nm types XFP/10G/1550L/SM/LC
XFP/11G/1550L/SM/LC

Network interface • integrated, very-long reach DWDM interface (100 GHz wavelength
characteristics grid)
• Data rates in the range from 9.9532 Gbit/s to 11.0957 Gbit/s
• LC receptacles
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

2-16 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx

XFP transceivers XFP cages should only be populated with ADVA-approved XFP transceivers.
If you use non-ADVA approved XFPs in conjunction with channel modules,
ADVA cannot guarantee the behavior of the module. When the client in-
terface is not used, the corresponding XFP cage does not need to be pop-
ulated with an XFP transceiver.

Signal Path Figure 2-15 shows the functional block diagram (very simplified) and il-
lustrates the signal path, which is described below.

WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx Overhead Termination/


Performance Monitoring
Rx STM-64/OC-192 Tx
C-R o OTU2/DW OTU2/DW e N-T
3R 10 GbE (MAC)
e FEC FEC/EFEC o
PCS 64B/66B
850/1310 nm
XFP transceiver
STM-64/OC-192
o OTU2/DW OTU2/DW e
3R 10 GbE (MAC)
C-T e FEC FEC/EFEC o N-R
Tx PCS 64B/66B Rx
Client Network
port C Transmit direction port N
Receive direction

Fig. 2-15: WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx Functional Block Diagram (Simplified)

Transmit direction In the transmit direction, the following takes place:


The receiver (Rx) of the client port receives the client signal at a non-
WDM wavelength from the CPE through the C-R connector. The input sig-
nal is converted to the electrical domain and a clock and data recovery
circuit performs full 3R signal regeneration at any selected data rate.
The regenerated signal is optionally mapped into a G.709 compliant frame
structure. Overhead processing as well as ingress and egress client data
performance monitoring are performed. When operating in the OTU2
mode, standard FEC on the client port and enhanced FEC on the network
port are accomplished. The transmitter (Tx) converts the output signal
back to an optical signal and transmits it at a specific ITU-T wavelength
through the N-T connector to the far end of the link.

Receive direction In the receive direction, the following takes place:


The receiver (Rx) of the network port receives the optical signal at a spe-
cific ITU-T wavelength through the N-R connector. The input signal is
converted to the electrical domain and regenerated (3R function). If an
OTN signal is received, it is de-mapped from the G.709 compliant frame
and EFEC/FEC functions are carried out. Overhead processing and client
data performance monitoring are performed. The resulting signal is then
routed to the transmitter (Tx) of the client port. The transmitter converts
the electrical signal back to an optical one and transmits it at a non-WDM
wavelength through the connector C-T to the CPE.
Placement The WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx is 4 HP wide. It can be placed in any 5 HU slot of
the 7HU Shelf and the appropriate slots of the 1HU Shelf.
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

LED Indicators Different LED indicators provide a quick visual check of the operating sta-
tus of the module and its ports. For details, refer to the Troubleshooting
Guide, Chapter 3”, p. 3-1.

Document Version 7.1.5 2-17


Hardware Description

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 2-16, Figure 2-17 and Figure 2-18.

Module Type Label


Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
WCC-PC-10G-V
#D01
Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Output Power Range: +5 to +7 dBm XFP xxxxxxxxxxxx
Receiver Dynamic Range: -22 to -8 dBm XFP
Wavelength: 1529.55 nm/SM /
Support Data Rate [Gbit/s]: 9.9532, 9.9532,
10.3125 10.3125
10.51875, 10.51875,
10.6642, 10.6642,
10.7092, 10.7092,
11.0491, 11.0491,
11.0957 11.0957
Laser Module

Fig. 2-16: Example of a WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx Module Type Label

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 2-17: Example of a WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 2-18: Example of a WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

2-18 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


WCC-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx

2.5 WCC-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx
The WCC-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx is a core type 10G channel module specifically
designed for the use in CWDM transport systems and very-long distance
transmission. It has the same design, functionality and appearance as the
WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx. Therefore, the description in Section 2.4 “WCC-PC-
10G-V#Dxx”, p. 2-15 adequately applies to the WCC-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx.
The only difference is that the WCC-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx features an ITU-T
compliant, 20 nm spaced CWDM interface supporting 4 channels via 4 dis-
crete module variants. However, the maximum realizable fiber link dis-
tances are shorter in comparison to the WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx.
The WCC-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx works only in conjunction with the appropriate
CWDM optical filter modules. It cannot be deployed in topologies with op-
tical amplifiers.

Variants • WCC-PC-10G-V#C1530
• WCC-PC-10G-V#C1550
• WCC-PC-10G-V#C1570
• WCC-PC-10G-V#C1590

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 2-19, Figure 2-20 and Figure 2-21.

Module Type Label


Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
WCC-PC-10G-V
#C1530
Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Output Power Range: +5 to +7 dBm XFP xxxxxxxxxxxx
Receiver Dynamic Range: -22 to -8 dBm XFP
Wavelength: 1531 nm/SM /
Support Data Rate [Gbit/s]: 9.9532, 9.9532,
10.3125 10.3125
10.51875, 10.51875,
10.6642, 10.6642,
10.7092, 10.7092,
11.0491, 11.0491,
11.0957 11.0957
Laser Module

Fig. 2-19: Example of a WCC-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx Module Type Label


HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 2-19


Hardware Description

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 2-20: Example of a WCC-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 2-21: Example of a WCC-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.

HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

2-20 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#D01-32

2.6 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#D01-32
Variants:
Module name
none
Serial number

Status LED indicators

Transmitter connector (C4-T) for client


signal output
Receiver connector (C4-R) for client
signal input

The description of the client port C4


applies for the client ports C1 to C3
accordingly.

Receiver connector (N-R) for network


signal input
Transmitter connector (N-T) for network
signal output

Item number

Fig. 2-22: 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#D01-32 Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 2-5 lists all abbreviations on the 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#D01-32


faceplate and their meanings.
Table 2-5: 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#D01-32 Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
P module’s power supply status T transmit
Mod module’s operating states R receive
C1 operating states of the client port 1 C1 client port 1
C2 operating states of the client port 2 C2 client port 2
C3 operating states of the client port 3 C3 client port 3
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

C4 operating states of the client port 4 C4 client port 4


N operating states of the network port N network port

Document Version 7.1.5 2-21


Hardware Description

Description The 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#D01-32 is a core type 4-port TDM channel


module with pluggable client interfaces and one tunable network inter-
face. It is specifically designed for the use in the C band of the DWDM
transport systems. The module performs electrical multiplexing and de-
multiplexing of up to four client interface signals onto one wavelength.
The client ports support STM-16/OC-48 and OTU-1, and are multiplexed
according to the OTN standard, as described in ITU-T G.709, using trans-
parent asynchronous aggregation of ODU1 tributaries into OTU2.
STM-16/OC-48 client interface signals at 2.488 Gbit/s are either trans-
ported transparently or regenerated at the RS/Section layer. The client in-
terface signals are end-to-end clock transparent and can be used for clock
distribution, but holdover is not supported. If demultiplexing fails, a lo-
cal 20 ppm oscillator will be used as clock source.
The network port supports OTU2 with standard FEC at 10.709 Gbit/s or
OTU2V with enhanced FEC at 11.003 Gbit/s.
The network interface is fully tunable in the C band and can be tuned to
any channel from #D01 to #D32 including #DC1 to #DC9. Each channel can
be tuned in the system management by using the NE management tools.
See User Guide.
Each client and network port supports one in-band management channel
(DCN).

Features • OTU mapping, according to ITU-T G.709:


• OTU2 with standard FEC at 10.7092 Gbit/s or
• OTU2V with enhanced FEC at 11.0032 Gbit/s
• Channel card protection
• Versatile switched protection (in conjunction with the RSM-SF, RSM-
OLM and VSM)
• ALS according to ADVA standard on client and network ports
• ALS according to ITU on client ports
• Comprehensive Fault and Performance monitoring of network and
client services
• Clock and data recovery with 3R signal conditioning
• When regeneration at the RS/Section layer is selected: in-band DCN
management channel (DCCr) on all ports
• Facility and terminal loop back for client and network ports

Client interface • Four independent, Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) MSA compliant
characteristics interfaces using LC connectors for fiber termination
• Support a mix of STM-16, OC-48 and OTU-1 services
• Data rates of 2.488 Gbit/s and 2.666 Gbit/s
• Support of 1310 nm intra-office, standard and long reach as well as
CWDM very-long and ultra-long reach

1310 nm types SFP/2G5U/1310S/SM/LC


SFP/2G5U/1310L/SM/LC
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

CWDM types SFP/2G5U/CxxxxL/SM/LC


SFP/2G5U/CxxxxV/SM/LC

2-22 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#D01-32

Network interface • integrated, very-long reach tunable DWDM interface


characteristics (100 GHz wavelength grid)
• Data rate of 10.7092 Gbit/s or 11.0032 Gbit/s
• Supports: 80-100 km
• LC connectors
SFP transceivers SFP cages should only be populated with ADVA-approved SFP transceivers.
If you use non-ADVA approved SFPs in conjunction with channel modules,
ADVA cannot guarantee the behavior of the module. When a client port
is not used, the corresponding SFP cage does not need to be populated
with an SFP transceiver.

Signal Path Figure 2-23, p. 2-23 shows the functional block diagram (simplified) and
illustrates the signal path, which is described below.

Client
ports
SFP transceiver 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#D01-32
Rx
C1-R o
e
C1 SerDes
o
C1-T e
Tx

Rx
C2-R o Network
e OTU2 port N
C2 SerDes
o Tx
N-T
e 10G e
C2-T o
Tx Optical Wavelength •
Transport Tunable N
Rx Processor e
C3-R Optics o
o N-R
e Rx
C3 SerDes
o
C3-T
e
Tx

Rx
C4-R o
e
C4 SerDes
o
C4-T e
Tx

ECC I/O bus DC/DC External power


Power supply
FPGA
HDLC Controller
Management interface

Ingress direction
Egress direction

Fig. 2-23: 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#D01-32 Functional Block Diagram

Transmit direction In the transmit direction, the following takes place:


Each client port receiver (Rx) receives signals from the CPE through the
client port connectors C1-R, C2-R, C3-R and C4-R. These signals are con-
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

verted to the electrical domain, data and clock recovery is performed and
the signals are serialized. STM-16/OC-48 client signals are monitored and
mapped into ODU1s. The 4x ODU1 signals are then multiplexed into a 10G

Document Version 7.1.5 2-23


Hardware Description

ODU2 signal. The ODU2 signal is converted to OTU2 by adding monitoring


overhead and FEC bytes. This signal is serialized and routed to the trans-
ceiver of the tunable network port. The transceiver converts the electrical
signal to an optical signal and transmits any C band channel through the
N-T port onto the link.
Receive direction In the receive direction, the following takes place:
The network port receiver (Rx) receives any C band channel through the
N-R port from the link. This signal is converted to the electrical domain,
data and clock recovery is performed and the signal is de-serialized. The
OTU2 FEC is terminated and the signal is monitored. The ODU2 frame is
demultiplexed into four individual ODU1 signals. The ODU1 signals are
then either de-mapped into 2.5G STM-16 or OC-48 signals, or kept as
ODU-1 client signals. Each client signal is de-serialized, and fed into the
SFP transceiver, which converts the electrical signal and transmits it
through the client port connector C1-T, C2-T, C3-T or C4-T to the CPE.

Placement The 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#D01-32 is 8 HP wide and therefore occupies


two regular slots. It can be placed in any 5 HU slot of the 7HU Shelf and
the appropriate slots of the 1HU Shelf.

LED Indicators Different LED indicators provide a quick visual check of the operating sta-
tus of the module and its ports. For details, refer to the Troubleshooting
Guide, Chapter 3”, p. 3-1.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 2-24, Figure 2-25 and Figure 2-26.

Module Type Label


Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
4TCC-PC+2G7+10G-V
#D01
Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Output Power Range: +5 to +7 dBm SFP xxxxxxxxxxxx
Receiver Dynamic Range: -22 to -8 dBm SFP
Wavelength: 1529.55 nm/SM /
Support Data Rate [Gbit/s]: 10.7092, 2.48832
11.0032

Laser Module

Fig. 2-24: Example of a 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#D01-32 Module Type Label


HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

2-24 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#D01-32

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 2-25: Example of a 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#D01-32 Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 2-26: Example of a 4TCC-PCTN-2G7+10G-V#D01-32 Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 2-25


Hardware Description

2.7 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx
Variants:
Module name
4TCC-PC-2G7+10G 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#D01
V#D01

S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx Serial number to

Status LED indicators 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#D64

4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#DC1
to
Transmitter connector (C4-T) for client
signal output 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#DC9
Receiver connector (C4-R) for client
signal input 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#DL1
to
4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#DL9
The description of the client port C4
applies for the client ports C1 to C3
accordingly.

Receiver connector (N-R) for network


signal input
Transmitter connector (N-T) for net-
work signal output

Item number

P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx

Fig. 2-27: 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 2-6 lists all abbreviations on the 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx faceplate
and their meanings.
Table 2-6: 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
P module’s power supply status T transmit
Mod module’s operating states R receive
C1 operating states of the client port 1 C1 client port 1
C2 operating states of the client port 2 C2 client port 2
C3 operating states of the client port 3 C3 client port 3
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

C4 operating states of the client port 4 C4 client port 4


N operating states of the network port N network port

2-26 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx

Description The 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx is a core type 4-port TDM channel module


with pluggable client interfaces. It is specifically designed for the use in
DWDM transport systems. The module performs electrical multiplexing
and de-multiplexing of up to four client interface signals onto one wave-
length. The client ports support STM-16/OC-48 and are multiplexed ac-
cording to OTN, as described in ITU-T G.709, using transparent asyn-
chronous aggregation of ODU1 tributaries into OTU2. STM-16/OC-48 cli-
ent interface signals at 2.488 Gbit/s are either transported transparently
or regenerated at the RS/Section layer. The client interface signals are
end-to-end clock transparent and can be used for clock distribution, but
holdover is not supported. If de-multiplexing fails, a local 20 ppm oscil-
lator will be used as clock source. The network port supports OTU2 with
standard FEC at 10.709 Gbit/s or OTU2V with enhanced FEC at 11.003
Gbit/s. Each client and network port supports one in-band management
channel (DCN).

Features • OTU mapping, according to ITU-T G.709:


• OTU2 with standard FEC at 10.7092 Gbit/s or
• OTU2V with enhanced FEC at 11.0032 Gbit/s
• Channel card protection
• Versatile switched protection (in conjunction with the RSM-SF, RSM-
OLM and VSM)
• ALS according to ADVA standard on client and network ports
• ALS according to ITU on client ports
• Comprehensive Fault and Performance monitoring of line and
services
• Clock and data recovery with 3R signal conditioning
• When regeneration at the RS/Section layer is selected: in-band DCN
management channel (DCCr) on all ports
• Facility and terminal loop back for client and network ports
Client interface • Four independent, Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) MSA compliant
characteristics interfaces using LC connectors for fiber termination
• Support a mix of STM-16 and OC-48 services
• Data rate of 2.488 Gbit/s
• Support of 1310 nm intra-office, standard and long reach as well as
CWDM very-long and ultra-long reach

1310 nm types SFP/2G5U/1310S/SM/LC


SFP/2G5U/1310L/SM/LC
CWDM types SFP/2G5U/CxxxxL/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/CxxxxV/SM/LC

Network interface • integrated, very-long reach DWDM interface (100 GHz wavelength
characteristics grid)
• Data rate of 10.7092 Gbit/s or 11.0032 Gbit/s
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

• Supports: 80-100 km
• LC connectors

Document Version 7.1.5 2-27


Hardware Description

SFP transceivers SFP cages should only be populated with ADVA-approved SFP transceivers.
If you use non-ADVA approved SFPs in conjunction with channel modules,
ADVA cannot guarantee the behavior of the module. When a client port
is not used, the corresponding SFP cage does not need to be populated
with an SFP transceiver.

Signal Path Figure 2-28, p. 2-28 shows the functional block diagram (simplified) and
illustrates the signal path, which is described below.

Client
ports
SFP transceiver 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx
Rx
C1-R o
e
C1 SerDes
o
C1-T e
Tx

Rx
C2-R o Network
e OTU2 port N
C2 SerDes
o Tx
e N-T
C2-T e
Tx Optical 10G o
Transport Fixed N
Rx Processor Optics e
C3-R o o
N-R
e Rx
C3 SerDes
o
C3-T e
Tx

Rx
C4-R o
e
C4 SerDes
o
C4-T e
Tx

ECC I/O bus DC/DC External power


Power supply
FPGA
HDLC Controller
Management interface

Ingress direction
Egress direction

Fig. 2-28: 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx Functional Block Diagram

Transmit direction In the transmit direction, the following takes place:


Each client port receiver (Rx) receives signals from the CPE through the
client port connectors C1-R, C2-R, C3-R and C4-R. These signals are con-
verted to the electrical domain, data and clock recovery is performed and
the signals are serialized. STM-16/OC-48 client signals are monitored and
mapped into ODU1s. The 4x ODU1 signals are then multiplexed into a 10G
ODU2 signal. The ODU2 signal is converted to OTU2 by adding monitoring
overhead and FEC bytes. This signal is serialized and routed to the trans-
ceiver of the network port. The transceiver converts the electrical signal
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

to an optical signal at the specific DWDM wavelength and transmits the


signal through the N-T port onto the link.

2-28 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx

Receive direction In the receive direction, the following takes place:


The network port receiver (Rx) receives the signal at a specific DWDM
wavelength through the N-R port from the link. This signal is converted
to the electrical domain, data and clock recovery is performed and the
signals are de-serialized. The OTU2 FEC is terminated and the signal is
monitored.
The ODU2 frame is demultiplexed into four individual ODU1 signals. The
ODU1 signals are then de-mapped into 2.5G STM-16 or OC-48 signals.
Each client signal is de-serialized, and fed into the SFP transceiver, which
converts the electrical signal to an optical one and transmits it through
the client port connector C1-T, C2-T, C3-T or C4-T to the CPE.

Placement The 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx is 8 HP wide and therefore occupies two reg-


ular slots. It can be placed in any 5 HU slot of the 7HU Shelf and the ap-
propriate slots of the 1HU Shelf.

LED Indicators Different LED indicators provide a quick visual check of the operating sta-
tus of the module and its ports. For details, refer to the Troubleshooting
Guide, Chapter 3”, p. 3-1. Troubleshooting Guide, Chapter 3”, p. 3-1

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 2-29, Figure 2-30 and Figure 2-31.

Module Type Label


Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
4TCC-PC+2G7+10G-V
#D01
Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Output Power Range: +5 to +7 dBm SFP xxxxxxxxxxxx
Receiver Dynamic Range: -22 to -8 dBm SFP
Wavelength: 1529.55 nm/SM /
Support Data Rate [Gbit/s]: 10.7092, 2.48832
11.0032

Laser Module

Fig. 2-29: Example of a 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx Module Type Label


HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 2-29


Hardware Description

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 2-30: Example of a 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 2-31: Example of a 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.

HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

2-30 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Cxxxx

2.8 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Cxxxx
The 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Cxxxx is a core type 4-port TDM channel module
specifically designed for the use in CWDM transport systems and very-long
distance transmission. It has the same design, functionality and appear-
ance as the 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx. Therefore, the description in Sec-
tion 2.7 “4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx”, p. 2-26 adequately applies to the
4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Cxxxx.
The only difference is that the 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Cxxxx features an
ITU-T compliant, 20 nm spaced CWDM interface supporting 4 channels via
4 discrete module variants. However, the maximum realizable fiber link
distances are shorter in comparison to the 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx.
The 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Cxxxx works only in conjunction with the appro-
priate CWDM optical filter modules. It cannot be deployed in topologies
with optical amplifiers.

Variants • 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#C1530
• 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#C1550
• 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#C1570
• 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#C1590

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 2-32, Figure 2-33 and Figure 2-34.

Module Type Label


Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
4TCC-PC+2G7+10G-V
#C1530
Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Output Power Range: +5 to +7 dBm SFP xxxxxxxxxxxx
Receiver Dynamic Range: -22 to -8 dBm SFP
Wavelength: 1531 nm/SM /
Support Data Rate [Gbit/s]: 10.7092, 2.48832
11.0032

Laser Module

Fig. 2-32: Example of a 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Cxxxx Module Type Label


HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 2-31


Hardware Description

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 2-33: Example of a 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Cxxxx Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 2-34: Example of a 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Cxxxx Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.

HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

2-32 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


WCC-PC1N-2G7U

2.9 WCC-PC1N-2G7U
Variants:
Module name none
Serial number

Status LED indicators

Transmitter connector (C-T) for client signal


output
Receiver connector (C-R) for client signal input

Transmitter connector (N-T) for network signal


output
Receiver connector (N-R) for network signal input

Item number

Fig. 2-35: WCC-PC1N-2G7U Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 2-6 lists all abbreviations on the WCC-PC1N-2G7U faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 2-7: WCC-PC1N-2G7U Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
P module’s power supply status T transmit
Mod module’s operating states R receive
C operating states of the client port C client port
N operating states of the network port N network port
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 2-33


Hardware Description

Description The WCC-PC1N-2G7U is a 2.7 Gbit/s core type WDM channel module with
a pluggable client and network interface. Both interfaces are designed for
the support of 850 nm and 1310 nm intra office, standard and long reach
as well for the support of CWDM long and very-long reach and DWDM very-
long and ultra-long reach. Additionally the client interface is used for the
transport of 1510 nm long reach.
The module is intended for the transport of OTU1, STM-16/OC-48 and GbE
services. The supported services can be transmitted in transparent mode.
The WCC-PC1N-2G7U can be used as back-to-back regenerator and to cre-
ate channel card protection and versatile switched protection.
It supports performance monitoring data at the client and network inter-
face for physical layer and SDH/SONET layer or FEC layer. For all applica-
tions, standard FEC according to ITU-T G.709 can be enabled at the
network and client port. OTN section layer protection switching is sup-
ported.

Features • OTU mapping according to ITU-T G.709


• Channel card protection
• Versatile switched protection (in conjunction with the VSM and
RSM-OLM, RSM-SF)
• ALS according to ADVA standard on client and network ports
• ALS according to ITU-T G.664 on the client ports
• Clock and data recovery with 3R signal conditioning
• Comprehensive Fault and Performance monitoring on the client and
network ports
• Forced on setting on the transmitter port of the client and network
interface
• Facility and terminal loop back for client and network ports

Client interface • Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) MSA compliant interface using
characteristics LC connectors for fiber termination
• Data rates: 2.48832 Gbit/s, 2.666057 Gbit/s, 1.250 Gbit/s
• Support of:
• 850 nm and 1310 nm intra-office, standard and long reach
• CWDM long and very-long reach
• DWDM very-long and ultra-long reach

850 nm types SFP/HS/850I/MM/LC


SFP/2G1/850I/MM/LC
1310 nm types SFP/CL/1310I/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/1310S/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/1310L/SM/LC
CWDM types SFP/2G5U/CxxxxL/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/CxxxxV/SM/LC
DWDM types SFP/2G5U/Dxxxx.xxU/SM/LC#Dxx
SFP/2G5U/Dxxxx.xxV/SM/LC#Dxx
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

2-34 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


WCC-PC1N-2G7U

Network interface • Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) MSA compliant interface using
characteristics LC connectors for fiber termination
• Data rates: 2.48832 Gbit/s, 2.666057 Gbit/s, 1.250 Gbit/s
• Support of:
• 850 nm and 1310 nm intra-office, standard and long reach
• CWDM long and very-long reach
• DWDM very-long and ultra-long reach

850 nm types SFP/HS/850I/MM/LC


SFP/2G1/850I/MM/LC
1310 nm types SFP/CL/1310I/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/1310S/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/1310L/SM/LC
CWDM types SFP/2G5U/CxxxxL/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/CxxxxV/SM/LC
DWDM types SFP/2G5U/Dxxxx.xxU/SM/LC#Dxx
SFP/2G5U/Dxxxx.xxV/SM/LC#Dxx

SFP Transceivers SFP cages should only be populated with ADVA-approved SFP transceivers.
If you use non-ADVA approved SFPs in conjunction with channel modules,
ADVA cannot guarantee the behavior of the module. When the client or
network interface is not used, the corresponding SFP cage does not need
to be populated with an SFP transceiver.

Signal Path Figure 2-36 shows the functional block diagram (simplified) and illus-
trates the signal path, which is described below.

Overhead Termination /
WCC-PC1N-2G7U Performance Monitoring

Rx STM-16/OC-48 Tx
C-R o STM-4/OC-12 OTU1/DW e N-T
OTU1/DW
e SFEC STM-1/OC-3 SFEC o
GbE
850/1310 nm, 850/1310 nm,
CWDM/DWDM CWDM/DWDM
SFP transceiver SFP transceiver
STM-16/OC-48
C-T o STM-4/OC-12 e N-R
OTU1/DW OTU1/DW
e SFEC STM-1/OC-3 SFEC o
Tx GbE Rx
Client Network
port C port N
Transmit direction
Receive direction

Fig. 2-36: WCC-PC1N-2G7U Functional Block Diagram (Simplified)

Transmit direction In the transmit direction, the following takes place:


The client port receiver (Rx) receives the optical CWDM/DWDM signal
through the C-R connector from the CPE. The signal is converted to the
electrical domain, and clock and data recovery is performed. STM-16/OC-
48, OTU1 or GbE alignment is carried out. The resulting signal can option-
ally be mapped into an OTU1 output signal with SFEC according to ITU-T
G.709 into an OTU1 frame with SFEC at the network interface. The trans-
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 2-35


Hardware Description

mitter (Tx) converts the electrical output signal back to an optical signal
at a specific CWDM/DWDM wavelength and transmits it through the N-T
connector onto the link.

Receive direction In the receive direction, the following takes place:


The network port receiver (Rx) receives the optical CWDM/DWDM signal
through the N-R connector from the link. This signal is converted to the
electrical domain, and clock and data recovery is performed.
STM-16/OC-48, OTU1 or GbE frame alignment is carried out. Data can op-
tionally be extracted from the OTU1 frame and routed to the transmitter
(Tx) of the client port. The transmitter converts the electrical signal back
to an optical one and transmits it through the client port connector C-T
to the CPE.

Placement The WCC-PC1N-2G7U is 4 HP wide. It can be placed in any 5 HU slot of


the 7HU Shelf and the appropriate slots of the 1HU Shelf.

LED Indicators Different LED indicators provide a quick visual check of the operating sta-
tus of the module and its ports. For details, refer to the Troubleshooting
Guide, Chapter 3”, p. 3-1.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 2-37, Figure 2-38 and Figure 2-39.

Module Type Label


Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
WCC-PC1N-2G7U

Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Port Type: SFP SFP xxxxxxxxxxxx
Support Data Rate [Gbit/s]: 2.48832, 2.48832,
2.666057, 2.666057,
1.339, 1.250
1.250
Laser Module

Fig. 2-37: Example of a WCC-PC1N-2G7U Module Type Label


HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

2-36 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


WCC-PC1N-2G7U

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 2-38: Example of a WCC-PC1N-2G7U Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 2-39: Example of a WCC-PC1N-2G7U Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 2-37


Hardware Description

2.10 WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx
Variants:
Module name
WCC-PC
2G7U-R
WCC-PC-2G7U-V#D01
S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx
Serial number to
WCC-PC-2G7U-V#D64
Status LED indicators

WCC-PC-2G7U-V#DC1
to
WCC-PC-2G7U-V#DC9
Transmitter connector (C-T) for client signal
output
Receiver connector (C-R) for client signal input WCC-PC-2G7U-V#DL1
to
WCC-PC-2G7U-V#DL9

Receiver connector (N-R) for network signal input


Transmitter connector (N-T) for network signal
output

Item number

P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx

Fig. 2-40: WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 2-8 lists all abbreviations on the WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 2-8: WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
P module’s power supply status T transmit
Mod module’s operating states R receive
C operating states of the client port C client port
N operating states of the network port N network port
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

2-38 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx

Description The WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx is a core type multirate WDM channel module


with a pluggable client interface. It is specifically designed for the use in
DWDM transport systems. The module converts client optical signals into
optical network signals with a specific wavelength in the ITU-T grid and
vice versa.
The WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx is intended for transport of OTU1, STM-16/OC-
48 and GbE services. The supported services can be transmitted in trans-
parent mode.
The module is available in 80 variants, one for each of the 80 DWDM chan-
nels.
The WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx can be used as back-to-back regenerator.
The module supports performance monitoring data at the client and net-
work ports for physical layer and SDH/SONET layer or FEC layer. For all ap-
plications, standard FEC according to ITU-T G.709 at the network and
client port. Enhanced FEC (proprietary) with higher coding gain is sup-
ported at the network port only. OTN section layer protection switching
is supported.

Features • OTU mapping according to ITU-T G.709


• Channel card protection
• Versatile switched protection (in conjunction with the VSM and
RSM-OLM, RSM-SF)
• ALS according to ADVA standard on the client and network ports
• ALS according to ITU-T G. 664 on the client ports
• Clock and data recovery with 3R signal conditioning
• Comprehensive Fault and Performance monitoring on the client and
network ports
• Forced on setting on the transmitter port of the client and network
interface
• Facility and terminal loop back for client and network ports

Client interface • Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) MSA compliant interface using LC
characteristics connectors for fiber termination
• Data rates: 2.48832 Gbit/s, 2.666057 Gbit/s and 1.250 Gbit/s
• Support of:
• 850 nm intra-office reach
• 1310 nm standard reach
• CWDM long reach

850 nm types SFP/HS/850I/MM/LC


SFP/2G1/850I/MM/LC
1310 nm types SFP/CL/1310I/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/1310S/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/1310L/SM/LC
CWDM types SFP/2G5U/CxxxxL/SM/LC
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

SFP/2G5U/CxxxxV/SM/LC

Document Version 7.1.5 2-39


Hardware Description

Network interface • integrated, 2.7 Gbit regional reach DWDM interface (100 GHz
characteristics wavelength grid)
• Data rates: 2.48832 Gbit/s, 2.666057 Gbit/s and 1.250 Gbit/s
• LC receptacles
SFP Transceivers SFP cages should only be populated with ADVA-approved SFP transceivers.
If you use non-ADVA approved SFPs in conjunction with channel modules,
ADVA cannot guarantee the behavior of the module. When the client in-
terface is not used, the corresponding SFP cage does not need to be pop-
ulated with an SFP transceiver.

Signal Path Figure 2-41 shows the functional block diagram (simplified) and illus-
trates the signal path, which is described below.

Overhead Termination /
WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx Performance Monitoring

Rx STM-16/OC-48 Tx
C-R o STM-4/OC-12 OTU1/DW e N-T
OTU1/DW
e SFEC STM-1/OC-3 SFEC o
850/1310 nm, GbE
CWDM/DWDM
SFP transceiver
STM-16/OC-48
C-T o STM-4/OC-12 e N-R
OTU1/DW OTU1/DW
e SFEC STM-1/OC-3 SFEC o
Tx GbE Rx
Client Network
port C port N
Transmit direction
Receive direction

Fig. 2-41: WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx Functional Block Diagram (Simplified)

Transmit direction In the transmit direction, the following takes place:


The client port receiver (Rx) receives the optical signal through the C-R
connector from the CPE. This signal is converted to the electrical domain,
and clock and data recovery is performed. STM-16/OC-48, OTU1 or GbE
frame alignment is carried out. The resulting signal can optionally be
mapped into an OTU1 output signal with SFEC at a specific ITU-T compli-
ant wavelength. The transmitter (Tx) converts the output signal back to
an optical signal at a specific DWDM wavelength and transmits it through
the N-T connector onto the link.

Receive direction In the receive direction, the following takes place:


The network port receiver (Rx) receives the optical signal at a specific
DWDM wavelength through the N-R connector from the link. This signal
is converted to the electrical domain, and clock and data recovery is per-
formed. STM-16/OC-48, OTU1 or GbE frame alignment is carried out. Data
can optionally be extracted from the OTU1 frame and routed to the trans-
mitter (Tx) of the client port. The transmitter converts the electrical sig-
nal back to an optical one and transmits it through the client port
connector C-T to the CPE.

Placement The WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx is 4 HP wide. It can be placed in any 5 HU slot


HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

of the 7HU Shelf and the appropriate slots of the 1HU Shelf.

2-40 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx

LED Indicators Different LED indicators provide a quick visual check of the operating sta-
tus of the module and its ports. For details, refer to the Troubleshooting
Guide, Chapter 3”, p. 3-1.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 2-42, Figure 2-43 and Figure 2-44.

Module Type Label


Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
WCC-PC-2G7U-R
#D01
Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Output Power Range: +3 to +7 dBm SFP xxxxxxxxxxxx
Receiver Dynamic Range: -30 to -10 dBm SFP
Wavelength: 1529.55 nm/SM /
Support Data Rate [Gbit/s]: 2.48832, 2.48832,
2.666057, 2.666057,
1.250 1.250

Laser Module

Fig. 2-42: Example of a WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx Module Type Label

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 2-43: Example of a WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 2-44: Example of a WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 2-41


Hardware Description

2.11 WCC-PC-2G7U-V#Cxxxx
The WCC-PC-2G7U-V#Cxxxx is a core type 2.7G channel module specifically
designed for the use in CWDM transport systems. It has the same design,
functionality and appearance as the WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx. Therefore, the
description in Section 2.10 “WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx”, p. 2-38 adequately ap-
plies to the WCC-PC-2G7U-V#Cxxxx.
The only difference is that the WCC-PC-2G7U-V#Cxxxx features an ITU-T
compliant, very-long reach, 20-nm spaced CWDM interface supporting 4
channels via 4 discrete module variants. However, the maximum realiz-
able fiber link distances are shorter in comparison to the WCC-PC-2G7U-
R#Dxx.
The WCC-PC-2G7U-V#Cxxxx works only in conjunction with the appropri-
ate CWDM optical filter modules. It cannot be deployed in topologies with
optical amplifiers.

Variants • WCC-PC-2G7U-V#C1530
• WCC-PC-2G7U-V#C1550
• WCC-PC-2G7U-V#C1570
• WCC-PC-2G7U-V#C1590

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 2-45, Figure 2-46 and Figure 2-47.

Module Type Label


Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
WCC-PC-2G7U-V
#C1530
Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Output Power Range: +3 to +7 dBm SFP xxxxxxxxxxxx
Receiver Dynamic Range: -30 to -10 dBm SFP
Wavelength: 1531 nm/SM /
Support Data Rate [Gbit/s]: 1.250, 1.250,
2.48832, 2.48832,
2.666057 2.666057

Laser Module

Fig. 2-45: Example of a WCC-PC-2G7U-V#Cxxxx Module Type Label


HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

2-42 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


WCC-PC-2G7U-V#Cxxxx

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 2-46: Example of a WCC-PC-2G7U-V#Cxxxx Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 2-47: Example of a WCC-PC-2G7U-V#Cxxxx Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 2-43


Hardware Description

2.12 4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5
Variants:
4TCC-PCN
2G1U+2G5
Module name none
S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx

Serial number
Status LED indicators

Transmitter connector (C4-T) for client signal


output
Receiver connector (C4-R) for client signal input

The description of the client port C4 applies


for the client ports C1 to C3 accordingly.

Transmitter connector (NW-T) for network signal


output (line West)
Receiver connector (NW-R) for network signal
input (line West)

Transmitter connector (NE-T) for network signal


output (line East)
Receiver connector (NE-R) for network signal
input (line East)

Item number
P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx

Fig. 2-48: 4TCC-PCN-2G1U-2G5 Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 2-9 lists all abbreviations on the 4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5 faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 2-9: 4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5 Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
P module’s power supply status T transmit
Mod module’s operating states R receive
C1 operating states of the client port 1 C1 client port 1
C2 operating states of the client port 2 C2 client port 2
C3 operating states of the client port 3 C3 client port 3
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

C4 operating states of the client port 4 C4 client port 4


NE operating states of the network port East NE network port East
NW operating states of the network port West NW network port West

2-44 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5

Description The 4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5 is a core type, 4-port multirate TDM channel


module. It can transport a mix of 1G FC, 2G FC, GbE and FICON, multi-
plexed into an STM-16/OC-48 link, carried over a specific ITU-T compliant
wavelength.

Transport of 2G FC is only supported by client port 4.

The client signals are mapped into GFP frames, and virtual concatenation
at STS-1/VC-3/VC-4 level is used when multiplexing the GFP frames into
the STM-16/OC-48 link.

Features • Transparent or framed GFP mapping, according to ITU-T G.7041


• Virtual concatenation, according to ITU-T G.707 and G.783
• Channel protection (1+1 MSP)
• Versatile protection (in conjunction with the VSM)
• Clock and data recovery with 3R signal conditioning
• ALS according to ADVA standard on network ports
• Fault and performance monitoring of line and services
• In-band DCN management via DCCr, or DCCm on the network ports
• Facility and terminal loop back for client and network ports

Client interface • Four independent, Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) MSA compliant
characteristics interfaces using LC connectors for fiber termination
• Data rates of 1.0625 Gbit/s, 1.2500 Gbit/s or 2.125 Gbit/s
• Support of 850 nm and 1310 intra-office reach, 1310 nm standard
reach and long reach as well as CWDM long and very-long reach

850 nm types SFP/HS/850I/MM/LC


SFP/2G1/850I/MM/LC
1310 nm types SFP/HS/1310S/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/1310S/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/1310L/SM/LC
CWDM types SFP/2G5U/CxxxxL/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/CxxxxV/SM/LC

Network interface • Two independent Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) MSA compliant
characteristics interfaces using LC connectors for fiber termination
• DWDM (100 GHz wavelength grid) or CWDM (20 nm wavelength grid)
• Data rate of 2.488320 Gbit/s
• Support of 1310 nm intra-office, standard and long reach, CWDM
long and very-long reach, and DWDM very-long and ultra-long reach.

1310 nm types SFP/2G5U/1310S/SM/LC


SFP/2G5U/1310L/SM/LC
CWDM types SFP/2G5U/CxxxxL/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/CxxxxV/SM/LC
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

DWDM types SFP/2G5U/Dxxxx.xxU/SM/LC#Dxx


SFP/2G5U/Dxxxx.xxV/SM/LC#Dxx

Document Version 7.1.5 2-45


Hardware Description

SFP transceivers SFP cages should only be populated with ADVA-approved SFP transceivers.
If you use non-ADVA approved SFPs in conjunction with channel modules,
ADVA cannot guarantee the behavior of the module. When a client or net-
work interface is not used, the corresponding SFP cage does not need to
be populated with an SFP transceiver.

Signal Path Figure 2-49, p. 2-46 shows the functional block diagram (very simplified)
and illustrates the signal path when the module is operating in channel
protection mode.

Network
ports
Client port 1, 2, 3: GbE, FC, FICON
Client port 4: GbE, FC, FICON, 2GFC 4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5 SFP transceiver STM-16/
SDH/ OC-48
Client SONET Tx
ports e NW-T
Framer o

SerDes
Services SFP transceiver NW
e
SDH/ o
Rx SONET NW-R
C1-R o Rx
e GbE Framer
SerDes

C1 FC/
o GFP-T
FICON
C1-T e
Tx ECC

Rx
C2-R o SDH/
e GbE MAC GFP concate-
SONET Tx
SerDes

GFP-F Generic nation NE-T


C2 FC/ Packet buffer Framer e
o FICON o

SerDes
C2-T e NE
Tx SDH/ e
concate- SONET o NE-R
nation Framer
Rx
Rx
C3-R o
e GbE GFP
SerDes

C3 FC/ GFP-T Generic


o FICON
e HDLC
C3-T Management
Tx
interfaces

MAC 10/100BaseT
Rx GFP-F
C4-R o Packet buffer Controller Switch
e GbE
Phy
SerDes

C4 FC/ RAM
o FICON RS-232
C4-T e
Tx DC/DC
Power converter

Ingress direction
Egress direction

Fig. 2-49: 4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5 Functional Block Diagram

Transmit direction In the transmit direction, the following takes place:


Each client port receiver (Rx) receives the optical signals from the CPE
through the C1-R, C2-R, C3-R and C4-R connectors. These signals are
converted to the electrical domain, data and clock recovery is performed
and the signals are serialized. For framed Ethernet services the signals are
passed through a MAC and the idle frames are removed from the payload.
For all services the GFP Mapper/De-mapper maps each client signal into
GFP frames. These are then mapped into virtual containers, which again
are multiplexed into an STM-16/OC-48 line signal. For protected applica-
tions, the module contains two SDH framers. The SDH/SONET signal from
HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

each framer is serialized and routed to the SFP transceivers of the east
and west network ports (NE and NW) respectively. Each transmitter (Tx)

2-46 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5

converts the electrical output signal back to an optical signal at a specific


CWDM/DWDM wavelength and transmits it through the NW-T and NE-T
ports onto the link.

Receive direction In the receive direction, the following takes place:


The network port receivers (Rx) receive signals at a specific DWDM wave-
length through the NW-R and NE-R connectors from the link. These sig-
nals are converted to the electrical domain, data and clock recovery is
performed and the signals are de-serialized. The signal from the two links
are monitored separately in two SDH/SONET framers. If protection is en-
abled, the active signal is selected based on a set of switching criteria.
The GFP Mapper/De-mapper de-maps the client signals and routes each
signal towards the configured client port. Each client signal is de-serial-
ized, and fed into the SFP transceiver, which converts the electrical signal
back to an optical one and transmits it through the client port connectors
(C1-T, C2-T, C3-T or C4-T) to the CPE.
When the module operates in MUX mode on network port West or on net-
work port East, the signal path is just like the one described above. The
difference is that the redundant network port is not used.

Placement The 4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5 is 4 HP wide. It can be placed in any 5 HU slot


of the 7HU Shelf and the appropriate slots of the 1HU Shelf.

LED Indicators Different LED indicators provide a quick visual check of the operating sta-
tus of the module and its ports. For details, refer to the Troubleshooting
Guide, Chapter 3”, p. 3-1.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 2-50, Figure 2-51 and Figure 2-52.

Module Type Label


Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5

Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Port Type: SFP SFP xxxxxxxxxxxx
Support Data Rate [Gbit/s]: 2.48832 1.0625,
1.250,
2.125
Laser Module

Fig. 2-50: Example of a 4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5 Module Type Label


HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 2-47


Hardware Description

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 2-51: Example of a 4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5 Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 2-52: Example of a 4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5 Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.

HWD_2_ChMod_cor.fm

2-48 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


Chapter 3
Access Type Channel Modules
This chapter contains the descriptions of all access type channel modules
available at the publication date of this Hardware Description.
Each description includes the front view of the module, the explanation
of the ports, the simplified block diagram and module specific details.
Moreover, the module’s key features are presented, the signal path within
the module is briefly discussed, and an example of the module’s labeling
are given.
F or all matters relating to module management, installation, trouble-
shooting and safety, refer to the Detailed Procedures, Detailed System De-
scription, User Guide, Installation Guide and Safety Guide.

This chapter includes the following module descriptions:


3.1 WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx
3.2 WCA-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx
3.3 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx
3.4 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Cxxxx
3.5 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx
3.6 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Cxxxx
3.7 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-L#Cxxxx
3.8 WCA-PCN-2G5U
3.9 2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5
3.10 2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5
3.11 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx
3.12 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Cxxxx
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description Document Version 7.1.5 3-1


Hardware Description

Identification Access type channel modules are identified by faceplate codes and the la-
bel printed on the board cover. Identification information is provided in
each module description.

Naming The module name is made up of a set of parts assembled according to a


Conventions very specific rule as exemplified below. The parts of the name represent
the module’s specific features.
Example:
4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#C1530

Integrated network interface type: CWDM


transmission distance - very long reach
CWDM channel 1530
Network port data rate: 4 Gbit/s
Max. Client port data rate: 4 Gbit/s, unspecific
Pluggable interface(s): pluggable client interfaces
Channel module type: Access type TDM channel module
Number of client ports: 4

This example describes an access type 4-port TDM channel module with
four pluggable client interfaces supporting a maximum client data rate of
4 Gbit/s. The aggregated data rate on the network port runs at 4 Gbit/s.
The module features an integrated very-long reach CWDM interface for
channel 1530.
Table 3-1, p. 3-2 lists the naming conventions used by the FSP 3000R7.

Table 3-1: Access Type Channel Module Naming Convention


Parts of the Name Code Meaning
Number of client x x = 2: 2-port TDM channel module
ports (only TDM x = 4: 4-port TDM channel module
channel modules
x = 8: 8-port TDM channel module
Channel module WCA Core type WDM channel module
type TCA Core type TDM channel module
Low speed
low-speed transparent channel module with fixed client
transparent at fixed LS
and network interface (s)
interface(s)
Pluggable PC Pluggable client interface(s)
interface(s)
(if applicable) PCN Pluggable client interface(s) and network interface(s)

Pluggable Pluggable client interface(s) and one pluggable network


PC1N
interface(s) interface
Pluggable and
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

tunable Pluggable client interface(s) and tunable network


PCTN
interface(s) interface(s)
(if applicable)

3-2 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


Table 3-1: Access Type Channel Module Naming Convention
Parts of the Name Code Meaning
Maximum client 10G Depending on the module type: e.g. 9.9532 Gbit/s,
port data rates 10.3125 Gbit/s, 10.51875 Gbit/s, 10.7092 Gbit/s,
11.0957 Gbit/s
2G1U Depending on the module type: e.g. 1.0625 Gbit/s,
1.250 Gbit/s and 2.125 Gbit/s (unspecific)
2G5 2.488320 Gbit/s
2G7 2.666057 Gbit/s
2G7U Depending on the module type: e.g. 2.666057 Gbit/s,
155.52 Mbit/s, 622.08 Mbit/s, 200 Mbit/s, 1.250
Gbit/s, 1.0625 Gbit/s, 2.125 Gbit/s (unspecific)
Network port data 2G5 2.488320 Gbit/s
rates 10G Depending on the module type: e.g. 10.7092 Gbit/s,
11.0032 Gbit/s
Integrated network interface type (if applicable):
transmission R regional reach link distances (240 km – 360 km)
distances U ultra-long reach link distances (120 km – 240 km)
V very-long reach link distances (70 km – 120 km)
L long reach link distance (30 km - 70 km)
WDM channel #Dxx DWDM channel (xx stands for channel 01 to 64),
#DCx DWDM C band intermediate channel (x stands for 1 - 8),
#DLx DWDM L band intermediate channel (x stands for 1 - 8)
according to FSP DWDM wavelength table
#Cxxxx CWDM channel 1470, 1490, 1510, 1530, 1550, 1570
1590, 1610 according to FSP CWDM wavelength table

General WCAs and xTCAs are cost-optimized for use in metro-access networks.
WCAs do not perform SDH/Sonet framing. TCAs support proprietary fram-
ing and potentially in-band DCN management. Both WCAs and TCAs only
carry out performance monitoring on the optical layer. Access type chan-
nel modules are able to overcome link distances of up to about 100 km
without dispersion compensation or 3R signal regeneration.
WCAs and xTCAs are hot swappable and customer installable. This enables
a scalable, in-service expansion at any time.
Module Design Access type channel modules are designed as single-slot or two-slot plug-
in modules that are compatible with any 7HU Shelf (SH7HU) or 1HU Shelf
(SH1HU).
The SFP/XFP design allows in-service configuration on an as-needed basis
without affecting other active ports.
The receptacles of the integrated interfaces and the cages for the plug-
gable transceivers are angled at 45° to preserve minimum fiber bend radii
when connecting the optical cables.
Access type channel modules have special EMC contact strips attached to
them, which creates a tight seal with neighboring modules. The EMC con-
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

tact strips avoid unintended propagation of electromagnetic energy to-


wards the external environment that might disrupt other equipment.

Document Version 7.1.5 3-3


Hardware Description

Module Handling WCAs and xTCAs are electrostatic sensitive modules. Therefore they must
be handled with care. For information on module handling, refer to the
Detailed Procedures.
Module Variants Access type channel modules with integrated network interfaces are
available in CWDM and DWDM variants.
Management and Using the Network Element Control Unit (NCU), all access type channel
Operating Status modules are SNMP manageable and fully supported through the Network
Management System (NMS). Management allows user access to module
conditions as well as network status. The status of receivers and trans-
mitters can either be read off the faceplate LED indicators or observed
with SNMP-based network management tools. Commands for controlling
and status query are transmitted via the internal system bus between the
channel modules and the NCU.

Faceplate Markings All FSP 3000R7 access type channel modules have the same faceplate
markings. Legacy access type channel modules differ in marking of their
faceplates. LED indicator and optical port markings of the individual mod-
ules are explained in the appropriate module descriptions.

LED Indicators All access type channel modules have tri-color LED indicators that are vis-
ible through the faceplates.
Legacy access type channel modules have additional multicolor LED indi-
cators (two LEDs per port).
The colors of each LED display different operating states. The status that
each color represents is described in the Troubleshooting Guide.

Labeling Access type channel modules have several printed labels (module type la-
bel, certification label and warranty label) on the board cover, which con-
tain specific module information. The labels of the individual modules are
shown in the appropriate module descriptions.

Module Type Label This label contains module information, such as


• the name of the module
• the module type
• the serial number and its bar code
• the item number and its bar code
• technical specifications (channel number, output power range,
receiver dynamic range, wavelength and supported data rates of the
module)

Certification Label This label provides approved certification marks.

Warranty Label Damage or removal of the warranty label will void the warranty.
ADVA AG Optical Networking will disclaim the implied warranty of mer-
chantability.
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

3-4 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx

3.1 WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx
Variants:
Module name WCA-PC-10G-V#D01
to
Serial number
WCA-PC-10G-V#D64
Status LED indicators

WCA-PC-10G-V#DC1
to
WCA-PC-10G-V#DC8

WCA-PC-10G-V#DL1
to
WCA-PC-10G-V#DL8

Transmitter connector (C-T) for client signal


output
Receiver connector (C-R) for client signal input

Receiver connector (N-R) for network signal input


Transmitter connector (N-T) for network signal
output

Item number

Fig. 3-1: WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx Front View

The WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx is a converted FSP 2000 Release 6.2 module as


indicated by the asterisk printed on its faceplate. The module provides
full FSP 2000 Release 6.2 functionality. Monitoring and troubleshooting
follow FSP 2000 Release 6.2 rules. This mainly concerns ALS and LED
behavior.

Faceplate Markings Table 3-2 and Table 3-3, p. 3-6 list all abbreviations on the
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx faceplate and their meanings.

Document Version 7.1.5 3-5


Hardware Description

Optical Port Markings


Table 3-2: WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx Optical Port Markings
Optical Ports Meaning
R receive
T transmit
C client port
N network port

LED Indicator There are two LED indicators per port. One displays the status of the
Markings transmitter and the other the status of the receiver of the corresponding
port.
Table 3-3: WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx LED Indicator Markings
LEDs Meaning LEDs Meaning
O/E module’s power supply Lp looping back on the client
status/error condition port or the network port
C/R receiver status of the client C/T transmitter status of the
port client port
N/R receiver status of the network N/T transmitter status of the
port network port

Description The WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx is an access type multirate 10G WDM channel


module specifically designed for the use in DWDM transport systems with
very-long distance transmission. The module has an Extended Form-factor
Pluggable (XFP) MSA compliant interface on the client side.
On the network side, it features an integrated 10 Gigabit, very-long
reach, 100 GHz-spaced DWDM interface. The module is available in 80
variants, one for each of the 80 FSP 3000R7 DWDM channels it supports.
For fiber termination, the XFP transceivers use LC connectors while the
network interface uses MU/PC duplex receptacles.
The WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx is designed for transport of STM-64/OC-192,
10 GbE LAN PHY, 10GbE WAN PHY and 10G FC services over a specific ITU-
T-compliant wavelength between the ingress and egress node. Transpar-
ent mode is not supported.
The module provides clock and data recovery at any supported data rate.
It can also be used as a unidirectional inline regenerator. The WCA-PC-
10G-V#Dxx only supports performance monitoring on the optical layer.
Standard FEC according to ITU-T G.709 is not provided. Internal loop
backs or external loop backs are supported on both the client port and
network port.
XFP transceivers XFP cages should only be populated with ADVA-approved XFP transceivers.
If you use non-ADVA approved XFPs in conjunction with channel modules,
ADVA cannot guarantee the behavior of the module. When the client in-
terface is not used, the corresponding XFP cage does not need to be pop-
ulated with an XFP transceiver. The client interface can optionally be
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

equipped with XFP transceivers listed in the table below.

3-6 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx

850 nm types XFP/10G/850I/MM/LC


1310 nm types XFP/10G/1310S/SM/LC
1550 nm types XFP/10G/1550L/SM/LC

Signal Path Figure 3-2 shows the functional block diagram (simplified) and illustrates
the signal path, which is described below.

Rx
WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx Tx
C-R o e N-T
3R
e o
1310 nm
XFP transceiver

o e
3R
C-T e o N-R
Tx Rx
Client Network
port port
Transmit direction
Receive direction

Fig. 3-2: WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx Functional Block Diagram

Transmit direction In the transmit (ingress) direction, the following takes place:
The client port receiver (Rx) receives the optical signal through the C-R
connector from the CPE. This signal is converted to the electrical domain
and clock and data recovery is performed. The regenerated signal is rout-
ed to the transmitter (Tx) of the network port. The transmitter converts
the electrical output signal back to an optical signal at a specific DWDM
wavelength and transmits it through the N-T connector onto the link.

Receive direction In the receive (egress) direction, the following takes place:
The network port receiver (Rx) receives the signal at a specific DWDM
wavelength through the N-R connector from the link. This signal is con-
verted to the electrical domain, and data and clock recovery is performed.
The regenerated signal is fed into the XFP transceiver. The transmitter
(Tx) converts the electrical signal back to an optical one and transmits it
through the client port connector C-T to the CPE.

Placement The WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx is 4 HP wide. It can be placed in any 5 HU slot of


the 7HU Shelf and the appropriate slots of the 1HU Slimline Shelf.

LED Indicators Different LED indicators provide a quick visual check of the operating sta-
tus of the module and its ports. For details, refer to the Troubleshooting
Guide, Chapter 3”, p. 3-1.
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 3-7


Hardware Description

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 3-3, Figure 3-4 and Figure 3-5.

Module Type Label


Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
WCA-PC-10G-V
#D01
Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Output Power Range: +4 to +7 dBm XFP xxxxxxxxxxxx
Receiver Dynamic Range: -23 to -8 dBm XFP
Wavelength: 1529.55 nm/SM /
Support Data Rate [Gbit/s]: 9.9532, 9.9532,
10.3125, 10.3125,
10.51875, 10.51875
10.709
Laser Module

Fig. 3-3: Example of a WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx Module Type Label

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 3-4: Example of a WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 3-5: Example of a WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

3-8 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


WCA-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx

3.2 WCA-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx
The WCA-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx is an access type 10G channel module specifi-
cally designed for the use in CWDM transport systems and very-long dis-
tance transmission. It has the same design, functionality and appearance
as the WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx. Therefore, the description in Section 3.1 “WCA-
PC-10G-V#Dxx”, p. 3-5 adequately applies to the WCA-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx.
The only difference is that the WCA-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx features an ITU-T
compliant, 20 nm spaced CWDM interface supporting 4 channels via 4 dis-
crete module variants. However, the maximum realizable fiber link dis-
tances are shorter in comparison to the WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx.
The WCA-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx works only in conjunction with the appropriate
CWDM optical filter modules. It cannot be deployed in topologies with op-
tical amplifiers.

Variants • WCA-PC-10G-V#C1530
• WCA-PC-10G-V#C1550
• WCA-PC-10G-V#C1570
• WCA-PC-10G-V#C1590

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 3-6, Figure 3-7 and Figure 3-8.

Module Type Label


Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
WCA-PC-10G-V
#C1530
Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Output Power Range: +4 to +7 dBm XFP xxxxxxxxxxxx
Receiver Dynamic Range: -23 to -8 dBm XFP
Wavelength: 1531 nm/SM /
Support Data Rate [Gbit/s]: 9.9532, 9.9532,
10.3125, 10.3125,
10.51875, 10.51875
10.709
Laser Module

Fig. 3-6: Example of a WCA-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx Module Type Label


HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 3-9


Hardware Description

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 3-7: Example of a WCA-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 3-8: Example of a WCA-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.

HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

3-10 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx

3.3 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx
Variants:
8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G Module name 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#D01
V#D01

S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx Serial number to


8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#D64
Status LED indicators

8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#DC1
Transmitter connector (C8-T) for client to
signal output
8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#DC8
Receiver connector (C8-R) for client
signal input
8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#DL1

The description of the client interface to


C8 applies for the client interfaces C1 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#DL8
to C7 accordingly.

Item number
P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx

Fig. 3-9: 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx Front View

The 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx is a converted FSP 2000 Release 6.2


module as indicated by the asterisk printed on its faceplate. The module
provides full FSP 2000 Release 6.2 functionality. Monitoring and
troubleshooting follow FSP 2000 Release 6.2 rules. This mainly concerns
ALS and LED behavior.

Faceplate Markings Table 3-4 and Table 3-5, p. 3-12 list all abbreviations on the
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx faceplate and their meanings.

Document Version 7.1.5 3-11


Hardware Description

Optical Port Markings


Table 3-4: 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx Optical Port Markings
Optical Ports Meaning
R receive
T transmit
C1 client port 1
C2 client port 2
C3 client port 3
C4 client port 4
C5 client port 5
C6 client port 6
C7 client port 7
C8 client port 8
N/R receiver connector of the network port
N/T transmitter connector of the network port

LED Indicator There are two LED indicators per port. One displays the status of the
Markings transmitter and the other the status of the receiver of the corresponding
port.
Table 3-5: 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx LED Indicator Markings
LEDs Meaning LEDs Meaning
On power supply status of the Err error condition; self-test
module procedure
N/R receiver status of the network N/T transmitter status of the
port network port
C1/R receiver status of the client C1/T transmitter status of the
port 1 client port 1
C2/R receiver status of the client C2/T transmitter status of the
port 2 client port 2
C3/R receiver status of the client C3/T transmitter status of the
port 3 client port 3
C4/R receiver status of the client C4/T transmitter status of the
port 4 client port 4
C5/R receiver status of the client C5/T transmitter status of the
port 5 client port 5
C6/R receiver status of the client C6/T transmitter status of the
port 6 client port 6
C7/R receiver status of the client C7/T transmitter status of the
port 7 client port 7
C8/R receiver status of the client C8/T transmitter status of the
port 8 client port 8

Description The 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx is an access type 8-port TDM channel mod-


ule specifically designed for the use in DWDM transport systems and very-
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

long distance transmission. The module has eight Small Form-factor Plug-
gable (SFP) MSA compliant interfaces on the client side.

3-12 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx

On the network side, it features a single integrated, 10.709 Gbit/s, very-


long reach, 100 GHz-spaced DWDM interface. The module supports a cli-
ent data rate of 1.0625 Gbit/s, 1.250 Gbit/s and 2.125 Gbit/s and multi-
ple clock settings. For fiber termination, all optical interfaces use LC
connectors.
The module transports 8 x GbE, 8 x FC and 8 x 2G FC signals over a specific
ITU-T compliant wavelength between the ingress and egress node. Un-
used transceiver cages can remain empty. An unconnected client inter-
face or the absence of an SFP transceiver does not affect operation of the
terminated services.
The 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx provides clock and data recovery and per-
forms 3R signal conditioning at any supported data rate. It can also be
used as a unidirectional inline regenerator. In this case the client inter-
faces need not be populated with SFP transceivers.
The module supports performance monitoring both on the client ports
and the network port. Internal loop backs or external loop backs are sup-
ported on the client ports and on the network port. Each client port can
be looped back individually.
SFP transceivers SFP cages should only be populated with ADVA-approved SFP transceivers.
If you use non-ADVA approved SFPs in conjunction with channel modules,
ADVA cannot guarantee the behavior of the module. When a client port
is not used, the corresponding SFP cage does not need to be populated
with an SFP transceiver. The client interfaces can optionally be equipped
with SFP transceivers listed in the table below.
850 nm types SFP/HS/850I/MM/LC
SFP/2G1/850I/MM/LC
1310 nm types SFP/HS/1310S/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/1310S/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/1310L/SM/LC
SFP/CL/1310I/SM/LC

Signal Path Figure 3-10, p. 3-14 shows the functional block diagram (simplified) and
illustrates the signal path.

Transmit direction In the transmit (ingress) direction, the following takes place:
Each client port receiver (Rx) receives the optical signals from the CPE
through the client port connectors C1-R to C8-R. These signals are con-
verted to the electrical domain and clock and data recovery is performed.
All signals are encoded, synchronized and mapped into four data streams
with a constant bit rate of 2.48832Gbit/s applying a proprietary method.
The 4 x 2.48832 Gbit/s data streams are multiplexed to a 10.70923 Gbit/s
common output signal. Mapping and multiplexing of the client signals
into the output signal is performed according to a minimal subset of the
ITU-T G.709 standard. This combined signal is routed to the transmitter
(Tx) of the network port. The transmitter converts the electrical output
signal back to an optical signal at a specific DWDM wavelength and trans-
mits it through the N-T connector onto the link.
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

Receive direction In the receive (egress) direction, the following takes place:
The network port receiver (Rx) receives the signal at a specific DWDM
wavelength through the N-R connector from the link. This signal is con-

Document Version 7.1.5 3-13


Hardware Description

verted to the electrical domain and clock and data recovery is performed.
The regenerated 10.70923 Gbit/s input signal is demultiplxed into its four
component 2.48832 Gbit/s data streams. Each client signal is demapped
from the 2.48832 Gbit/s data streams, decoded, serialized and fed into
the transmitter (Tx) of the corresponding client port. The transmitters
convert the electrical signals back to optical signals and transmit them
through the client port connectors C1-R to C8-R to the CPE.

Client
8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx
ports
SFP Transceiver TDM module
Rx
C8-R o
e
C8

Mux
o
e
C8-T
Tx

SFP Transceiver
Rx
C7-R o

Mux
e
C7 o

OTU1/ODU1
C7-T e
Tx

SFP Transceiver
Rx
C5-R o
Mux

e 10G transport
C5 o module
Network
C5-T e
Tx port N
OTU2/ODU2 Tx
SFP Transceiver e N-T
Mux

Rx o
C6-R o
e
C6 o
e
C6-T
Tx

SFP Transceiver
Rx
C3-R o
e
C3
OTU2/ODU2

o
Demux

e
C3-T e
Tx o
N-R
Rx
SFP Transceiver
Rx
C4-R o
e
C4
Demux

o
e
C4-T
OTU1/ODU1

Tx

SFP Transceiver
Rx
C1-R o
Demux

e
C1 o
e
C1-T
Tx

SFP Transceiver
Rx
C2-R
Demux

o
e
C2 o

C2-T e
Tx

Transmit direction
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

Receive direction

Fig. 3-10: 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx Functional Block Diagram (Simplified)

3-14 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx

Placement The 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx is 8 HP wide and therefore occupies two


regular slots. It can be placed in any 5 HU slot of the 7HU Shelf and the
appropriate slots of the 1HU Slimline Shelf.

LED Indicators Different LED indicators provide a quick visual check of the operating sta-
tus of the module and its ports. For details, refer to the Troubleshooting
Guide, Chapter 3”, p. 3-1.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 3-11, Figure 3-12 and Figure 3-13.

Module Type Label Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V
#D01
Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Output Power Range: +5 to +7 dBm SFP xxxxxxxxxxxx
Receiver Dynamic Range: -23 to -8 dBm SFP
Wavelength: 1529.55 nm/SM /
Support Data Rate [Gbit/s]: 10.709 1.0625,
1.25,
2.125

Laser Module

Fig. 3-11: Example of a 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx Module Type Label

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 3-12: Example of a 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 3-13: Example of a 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx Warranty Label
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.

Document Version 7.1.5 3-15


Hardware Description

3.4 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Cxxxx
The 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Cxxxx is an access type 4-port TDM channel
module specifically designed for the use in CWDM transport systems and
very-long distance transmission. It has the same design, functionality
and appearance as the 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx. Therefore, the descrip-
tion in Section 3.3 “8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx”, p. 3-11 adequately ap-
plies to the 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Cxxxx.
The only difference is that the 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Cxxxx features an
ITU-T compliant, 20 nm spaced CWDM interface supporting 4 channels via
4 discrete module variants. However, the maximum realizable fiber link
distances are shorter in comparison to the 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx.
The 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Cxxxx works only in conjunction with the ap-
propriate CWDM optical filter modules. It cannot be deployed in topolo-
gies with optical amplifiers.

Variants • 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#C1530
• 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#C1550
• 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#C1570
• 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#C1590

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 3-14, Figure 3-15 and Figure 3-16.

Module Type Label Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V
#C1530
Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Output Power Range: +5 to +7 dBm XFP xxxxxxxxxxxx
Receiver Dynamic Range: -23 to -8 dBm XFP
Wavelength: 1531 nm/SM /
Support Data Rate [Gbit/s]: 10.709 1.0625,
1.25,
2.125

Laser Module

Fig. 3-14: Example of a 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Cxxxx Module Type Label


HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

3-16 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Cxxxx

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 3-15: Example of a 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Cxxxx Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 3-16: Example of a 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Cxxxx Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 3-17


Hardware Description

3.5 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx
Variants:
Channel module name

Serial number 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#D01


to
Status LED indicators
4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#D64

4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#DC1
Transmitter connector (C4-T) for client signal to
output 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#DC8
Receiver connector (C4-R) for client signal input

4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#DL1
The description of the client interface C4 ap- to
plies for the client interfaces C1 to C3 accord-
4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#DL8
ingly.

Transmitter connector (N-T) for network signal


output
Receiver connector (N-R) for network signal input
Item number
Fig. 3-17: 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx Front View

The 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx is a converted FSP 2000 Release 6.2 module


as indicated by the asterisk printed on its faceplate. The module provides
full FSP 2000 Release 6.2 functionality. Monitoring and troubleshooting
follow FSP 2000 Release 6.2 rules.

Faceplate Markings Table 3-6 and Table 3-7, p. 3-19 list all abbreviations on the
4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx faceplate and their meanings.
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

3-18 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx

Optical Port Markings


Table 3-6: 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx Optical Port Markings
Optical Ports Meaning
R receive
T transmit
C1 client port 1
C2 client port 2
C3 client port 3
C4 client port 4
N/R network receiver port
N/T network transmitter port

LED Indicator There is one LED indicator per port. It displays the status of the transmit-
Markings ter and the status of the receiver of the corresponding port.
Table 3-7: 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx LED Indicator Markings
LEDs Meaning LEDs Meaning
O/E module’s power supply LP looping back on the client or
status/error condition network ports
C/4 transmitter and receiver C/3 transmitter and receiver
status of the client port 4 status of the client port 3
C/2 transmitter and receiver C/1 transmitter and receiver
status of the client port 2 status of the client port 1
N/R receiver status of the network N/T transmitter status of the
port network port

Description The 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx is an access type 4-port 4G TDM channel


module specifically designed for the use in DWDM transport systems with
very-long distance transmission. The module has four Small Form-factor
Pluggable (SFP) MSA compliant interfaces on the client side.
On the network side, it features a single integrated, very-long reach, 100
GHz-spaced DWDM interface. The module is available in 80 variants, one
for each of the 80 FSP 3000R7 DWDM channels it supports. When the
4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx is working in converter or regenerator mode, it
supports a maximum client data rate of 4.25 Gbit/s and offers multiple
clock settings.
The module can be used as an unidirectional dual regenerator or as a bi-
directional single module regenerator.
The 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx only supports performance monitoring of the
optical layer OPR, OPT, LOS and LOF (in TDM mode). Internal loop backs
or external loop backs are supported on the client ports and on the net-
work port.
Transmission of 1G FC, 2G FC and 4G FC in converter mode is performed
by the client interface C4 only. When operating in TDM mode, the 4TCA-
PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx supports either 4 x GbE or 4 x 1G FC signals at the cli-
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

ent interfaces C1 to C4.

Document Version 7.1.5 3-19


Hardware Description

Features • Versatile switched protection (in conjunction with the RSM-SF, RSM-
OLM and VSM)
• ALS according to ADVA standard (FSP 2000 Release 6.2 rules) on the
client ports
• Implementation of media conversion (copper to fiber and vice
versa)
• No mixture of protocols
• Clock and data recovery with 3R signal conditioning at any
supported data rate
• Fault and Performance monitoring on the client ports and network
port
• Support of multi clock settings
• Facility loop back on the client ports and network port

Client interface • Four independent, Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) MSA compliant
characteristics interfaces using LC connectors for fiber termination
• Data rates: 1.25 Gbit/s, 1.0625 Gbit/s, 2.125 Gbit/s, 4.25 Gbit/s
• In converter mode transmission of 1G FC, 2G FC and 4G FC by the
client interface C4
• In TDM mode transmission of 4 x GbE, 4 x 1G FC or 2 x 2G FC at the
client interfaces C1 to C4
• Each client port can be looped back individually
• Support of
• 850 and 1310 nm intra-office reach
• 1310 nm standard and long reach
• CWDM long and very-long reach
• GbE copper interface

850 nm types SFP/HS/850I/MM/LC


SFP/2G1/850I/MM/LC
1310 nm types SFP/HS/1310S/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/1310S/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/1310L/SM/LC
SFP/CL/1310I/SM/LC
CWDM types SFP/2G5U/CxxxxL/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/CxxxxV/SM/LC
SFP/4GU/CxxxxL/SM/LC
Electrical types SFP/GBE/ELECTRICAL/RJ45

Network interface • integrated, very-long reach, 100 GHz-spaced DWDM interface


characteristics • Data rates in TDM mode: 4.25 Gbit/s (4 x GbE or 4 x 1G FC)
• Data rates in converter mode:
• 1.0625 Gbit/s (1G FC),
• 2.125 Gbit/s (2G FC),
• 4.25 Gbit/s (4G FC)
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

• LC receptacles

3-20 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx

SFP transceivers SFP cages should only be populated with ADVA-approved SFP transceivers.
If you use non-ADVA approved SFPs in conjunction with channel modules,
ADVA cannot guarantee the behavior of the module. When a client port
is not used, the corresponding SFP cage does not need to be populated
with an SFP transceiver.

Signal Path Figure 3-18 shows the functional block diagram (simplified) and illus-
trates the signal path when the module is operating in TDM mode. The
signal path is described below.

4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V
TDM mode Converter mode
Client Network
Ports SFP Transceiver Port N
Rx Tx
C4-R o e N-T
CDR
e Mode Switch o
C4
o
C4-T
e
Tx
Controlling e
SFP Transceiver CDR
Rx
o N-R
C3-R Rx
o
e
C3
o Converter Mode and
C3-T e Regenerator Mode:
Tx 1 GFC, 2 GFC, 4 GFC
SFP Transceiver
TDM
TDM Mode:
Rx
C2-R o 4.250 Gbit/s proprietary
e
C2
o
C2-T
e
Tx
SFP Transceiver
Rx
C1-R o
e
C1
o
C1-T
e
Tx

Transmit direction
Receive direction

Fig. 3-18: 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx Functional Block Diagram (Simplified)

Transmit direction In the transmit (ingress) direction, the following takes place:
Each client port receiver (Rx) receives the optical signals from the CPE
through the client port connectors C1-R, C2-R, C3-R and C4-R. These sig-
nals are converted to the electrical domain and clock and data recovery
is performed. All signals are encoded, synchronized and mapped in a
higher bit rate frame. Using a proprietary method, the mapped signals are
then electronically multiplexed together to a combined output signal at
a data rate of 4.25 Gbit/s. This combined output signal is routed to the
transmitter (Tx) of the network port. The transmitter converts the elec-
trical output signal back to an optical signal at a specific DWDM wave-
length and transmits it through the N-T connector onto the link.

Receive direction In the receive (egress) direction, the following takes place:
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

The network port receiver (Rx) receives the signal at a specific DWDM
wavelength through the N-R connector from the link. This signal is con-
verted to the electrical domain and clock and data recovery is performed.

Document Version 7.1.5 3-21


Hardware Description

In the DEMUX section, the proprietary frame is demultiplexed into its


original component client signals. Each client signal is decoded, serial-
ized and fed into the transmitter (Tx) of the corresponding client port. The
transmitters convert the electrical signals back to optical signals and
transmit them through the client port connectors C1-T, C2-T, C3-T and
C4-T to the CPE.

Placement The 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx is 4 HP wide. It can be placed in any 5 HU


slot of the 7HU Shelf and the appropriate slots of the 1HU Slimline Shelf.
LED Indicators Different LED indicators provide a quick visual check of the operating sta-
tus of the module and its ports. For details, refer to the Troubleshooting
Guide, Chapter 3”, p. 3-1.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 3-19, Figure 3-20 and Figure 3-21.

Module Type Label Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V
#D01
Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Output Power Range: +4 to +7 dBm SFP xxxxxxxxxxxx
Receiver Dynamic Range: -26 to -10 dBm SFP
Wavelength: 1529.55 nm/SM /
Support Data Rate [Gbit/s]: 1.0625, 1.0625,
2.125, 1.25,
4.25 2.125,
4.25
Laser Module

Fig. 3-19: Example of a 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx Module Type Label

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 3-20: Example of a 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx Certification Label


HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

3-22 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 3-21: Example of a 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 3-23


Hardware Description

3.6 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Cxxxx
The 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Cxxxx is an access type 4-port TDM channel mod-
ule specifically designed for the use in CWDM transport systems and very-
long distance transmission. It has the same design, functionality and ap-
pearance as the 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx. Therefore, the description in
Section 3.5 “4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx”, p. 3-18 adequately applies to the
4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Cxxxx. The only differences are that the 4TCA-PC-
4GU+4G-V#Cxxxx features ITU-T compliant, 20 nm spaced CWDM client
and network interfaces supporting 8 channels via 8 discrete module vari-
ants. The integrated network interface consists of an embedded (not vis-
ible) transceiver to transport the module variant’s supported wavelength.
However, the maximum realizable fiber link distances are shorter in com-
parison to the 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx.
The 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Cxxxx works only in conjunction with the appro-
priate CWDM optical filter modules. It cannot be deployed in topologies
with optical amplifiers.

Variants • 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#C1470
• 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#C1490
• 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#C1510
• 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#C1530
• 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#C1550
• 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#C1570
• 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#C1590
• 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#C1610

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 3-22, Figure 3-23 and Figure 3-24.

Module Type Label Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V
#C1530
Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Output Power Range: +5 to +7 dBm SFP xxxxxxxxxxxx
Receiver Dynamic Range: -26 to -10 dBm SFP
Wavelength: 1531 nm/SM /
Support Data Rate [Gbit/s]: 1.0625, 1.0625,
2.125, 1.25,
4.25 2.125,
4.25
Laser Module

Fig. 3-22: Example of a 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Cxxxx Module Type Label


HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

3-24 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Cxxxx

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 3-23: Example of a 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Cxxxx Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 3-24: Example of a 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Cxxxx Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 3-25


Hardware Description

3.7 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-L#Cxxxx
The 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-L#Cxxxx is an access type 4-port TDM channel mod-
ule specifically designed for the use in CWDM transport systems and long
distance transmission. It has the same design, functionality and appear-
ance as the 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx. Therefore, the description in Section
3.5 “4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx”, p. 3-18 adequately applies to the 4TCA-PC-
4GU+4G-L#Cxxxx.
The only differences are that the 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-L#Cxxxx features
ITU-T compliant, 20 nm spaced CWDM client and network interfaces sup-
porting 8 channels via 8 discrete module variants. The integrated network
interface consists of an embedded (not visible) transceiver to transport
the module variant’s supported wavelength.
However, the maximum realizable fiber link distances are shorter in com-
parison to the 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx.
The 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-L#Cxxxx works only in conjunction with the appro-
priate CWDM optical filter modules. It cannot be deployed in topologies
with optical amplifiers.

Variants • 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-L#C1470
• 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-L#C1490
• 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-L#C1510
• 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-L#C1530
• 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-L#C1550
• 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-L#C1570
• 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-L#C1590
• 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-L#C1610

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 3-25, Figure 3-26 and Figure 3-27.

Module Type Label Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-L
#C1530
Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Output Power Range: +1 to +5 dBm SFP xxxxxxxxxxxx
Receiver Dynamic Range: -24 to -9 dBm SFP
Wavelength: 1531 nm/SM /
Support Data Rate [Gbit/s]: 1.0625, 1.0625,
2.125, 1.25,
4.25 2.125,
4.25
Laser Module

Fig. 3-25: Example of a 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-L#Cxxxx Module Type Label


HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

3-26 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-L#Cxxxx

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 3-26: Example of a 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-L#Cxxxx Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 3-27: Example of a 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-L#Cxxxx Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 3-27


Hardware Description

3.8 WCA-PCN-2G5U
Variants:
WCA-PCN Module name none
2G5U

S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx
Serial number
Status LED indicators

Transmitter connector (C-T) for client signal


output
Receiver connector (C-R) for client signal input

Transmitter connector (NW-T) for network signal


output (line West)
Receiver connector (NW-R) for network signal
input (line West)

Transmitter connector (NE-T) for network signal


output (line East)
Receiver connector (NE-R) for network signal
input (line East)

Item number

P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx

Fig. 3-28: WCA-PCN-2G5U Front View

The WCA-PCN-2G5U is a converted FSP 2000 Release 6.2 module as


indicated by the asterisk printed on its faceplate. The module provides
full FSP 2000 Release 6.2 functionality. Monitoring and troubleshooting
follow FSP 2000 Release 6.2 rules. This mainly concerns ALS and LED
behavior.

Faceplate Markings Table 3-8 and Table 3-9, p. 3-29 list all abbreviations on the
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

WCA-PCN-2G5U faceplate and their meanings.

3-28 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


WCA-PCN-2G5U

Optical Port Markings


Table 3-8: WCA-PCN-2G5U Optical Port Markings
Optical Ports Meaning
T transmit
R receive
C client port
NW network port West
NE network port East

LED Indicator There are two LED indicators per port. One displays the status of the
Markings transmitter and the other the status of the receiver of the corresponding
port.
Table 3-9: WCA-PCN-2G5U LED Indicator Markings
LEDs Meaning LEDs Meaning
O/E module’s power supply Lp looping back on the client or
status/error condition network ports
C/R receiver status of the client C/T transmitter status of the
port client port
NW/R receiver status of the network NW/T transmitter status of the
port West network port West
NE/R receiver status of the network NE/T transmitter status of the
port East network port East

Description The WCA-PCN-2G5U is an access type multirate WDM channel module with
a single client and dual network Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) MSA
compliant interfaces. The SFP transceivers use LC connectors for fiber ter-
mination. The module is designed for transport of services at data rates
ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s over a specific ITU-T compliant
wavelength between the ingress and egress node. This range covers FE,
GbE, ESCON, 1G FICON, 2G FICON, 1G FC, 2G FC, 1G CL, 2G CL, STM-1, STM-
4, STM-16, OC3, OC12, OC48, ATM 155 and ATM 622. The module supports
a maximum client data rate of 2.48 Gbit/s and offers multiple clock set-
tings. The following clock modes can be configured:
• clocked mode
One data rate is selected from the specified range and is set by the
user. The bit rate is fixed. Only signals with the adjusted data rate
can be received and transmitted. If the incoming data rate does not
match the adjusted data rate, the transceiver of the client port is
disabled and a clock error is indicated. Traffic stops.
• adaptive 3R mode
This mode is used for data rates that are one of the module’s data
rates. The supported data rates are automatically detected. If the
incoming data rate does not match the module data rate, the local
transceiver is disabled and a clock error is indicated. Traffic stops.
• adaptive 3R/odd rates mode
This mode allows the transport of data rates other than those speci-
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

fied for the module. That is, all possible data rates between 100
Mbit/s and 2500 Mbit/s can be automatically detected and clocked.

Document Version 7.1.5 3-29


Hardware Description

The WCA-PCN-2G5U provides clock and data recovery (CDR) and performs
3R signal conditioning at any supported data rate.
Along with wavelength conversion, the WCA-PCN-2G5U enables the imple-
mentation of media conversion (e.g. multimode to single-mode or copper
to fiber). Due to its dual network interfaces, the module can be used to
create channel protection or perform full-duplex 3R regeneration, and be
used for building ring configurations. In case the module is deployed as
a inline regenerator, the cage on the client side need not be populated
with an SFP transceiver. When the redundant network interface is not
used, the corresponding transceiver cage may stay empty.
The module is configurable for up to 80 DWDM channels on a 100 GHz
wavelength grid or for up to 8 CWDM channels on a 20 nm wavelength
grid. The WCA-PCN-2G5U provides performance monitoring on the optical
layer only. Internal loop backs or external loop backs are supported on
the client port and on the network port. Each network port can be looped
back individually.
SFP transceivers SFP cages should only be populated with ADVA-approved SFP transceivers.
If you use non-ADVA approved SFPs in conjunction with channel modules,
ADVA cannot guarantee the behavior of the module. When a client port
is not used, the corresponding SFP cage does not need to be populated
with an SFP transceiver. The client interface can optionally be equipped
with SFP transceivers listed in the table below.

850 nm types SFP/HS/850I/MM/LC


SFP/2G1/850I/MM/LC
1310 nm types SFP/HS/1310S/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/1310S/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/1310L/SM/LC
SFP/CL/1310I/SM/LC
CWDM types SFP/2G5U/CxxxxL/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/CxxxxV/SM/LC
SFP/FE/C1510U/SM/LC
Electrical types SFP/GBE/ELECTRICAL/RJ45

The network interfaces can optionally be equipped with SFP transceivers


listed in the table below.

850 nm types SFP/HS/850I/MM/LC


SFP/2G1/850I/MM/LC
1310 nm types SFP/HS/1310S/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/1310S/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/1310L/SM/LC
SFP/CL/1310I/SM/LC
CWDM types SFP/2G5U/CxxxxL/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/CxxxxV/SM/LC
SFP/FE/C1510U/SM/LC
CWDM types SFP/2G5U/Dxxxx.xxU/SM/LC#Dxx
SFP/2G5U/Dxxxx.xxV/SM/LC#Dxx
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

3-30 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


WCA-PCN-2G5U

Signal Path Figure 3-29 shows the functional block diagram (very simplified) and il-
lustrates the signal path when the module is operating in channel protec-
tion mode. The signal path is described below.

CWDM/DWDM Network
WCA-PCN-2G5U SFP transceiver port West
Tx
e NW-T
Client 3R
port o
Rx e
C-R o o NW-R
e Rx
o Tx
C-T e e NE-T
Tx o
RxNW 3R
850/1310 nm
e
SFP transceiver RxNE 3R
o NE-R
decision logic Rx
CWDM/DWDM Network
SFP transceiver port East

Transmit direction Active signal path


Receive direction

Fig. 3-29: WCA-PCN-2G5U Functional Block Diagram (Simplified)

Transmit direction In the transmit (ingress) direction, the following takes place:
The client port receiver (Rx) receives the optical signal from the CPE
through the client port connector C-R. This signal is converted to the
electrical domain and clock and data recovery performed. The regenerated
signal is routed to the SFP transceivers of the east and west network ports
(NE and NW) respectively. Each transmitter (Tx) converts the electrical
output signal back to an optical signal at a specific DWDM wavelength
and transmits it through the NW-T and NE-T connectors onto the link.

Receive direction In the receive (egress) direction, the following takes place:
The network port receivers (Rx) receive signals at a specific DWDM wave-
length through the NW-R and NE-R connectors from the link. These sig-
nals are converted to the electrical domain and data and clock recovery
is performed. The signals from the two links are monitored continuously.
If one of the receivers (Rx) detects a loss of signal, the decision logic
based on a set of switching criteria initiates the automatic switch-over,
provided a signal is available on the other receiver. The signal is fed into
the SFP transceiver of the client port. The transmitter (Tx) converts the
electrical signal back to an optical signal and transmit it through the cli-
ent port connector C-T to the CPE.
When the module operates in converter mode on network port West or on
network port East, the signal path is just like the one described above.
The difference is that the redundant network port is not used.
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

Placement The WCA-PCN-2G5U is 4 HP wide. It can be placed in any 5 HU slot of the


7HU Shelf and the appropriate slots of the 1HU Slimline Shelf.

Document Version 7.1.5 3-31


Hardware Description

LED Indicators Different LED indicators provide a quick visual check of the operating sta-
tus of the module and its ports. For details, refer to the Troubleshooting
Guide, Chapter 3”, p. 3-1.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 3-30, Figure 3-31 and Figure 3-32.

Module Type Label Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
WCA-PCN-2G5U

Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Port Type: SFP SFP xxxxxxxxxxxx
Support Data Rate [Mbit/s]: 155, 622, 155, 622,
10625, 10625,
1250, 1250,
2125, 2125,
2488 2488
Laser Module

Fig. 3-30: Example of a WCA-PCN-2G5U Module Type Label

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 3-31: Example of a WCA-PCN-2G5U Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 3-32: Example of a WCA-PCN-2G5U Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

3-32 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5

3.9 2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5
Variants:
Module name
2TCA-PCN none
1G3+2G5

S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx
Serial number
Status LED indicators

Transmitter connector (C2-T) for client signal


output
Receiver connector (C2-R) for client signal input

Transmitter connector (C1-T) for client signal


output
Receiver connector (C1-R) for client signal input

Transmitter connector (NW-T) for network signal


output (line West)
Receiver connector (NW-R) for network signal in-
put (line West)

Transmitter connector (NE-T) for network signal


output (line East)
Receiver connector (NE-R) for network signal in-
put (line East)

Item number
P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx

Fig. 3-33: 2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5 Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 3-10 list all abbreviations on the 2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5 faceplate and
their meanings.

Table 3-10: 2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5 Faceplate Markings


LED Indicators Optical Ports
P module’s power supply status T transmit
Mod module’s operating states R receive
C1 operating states of the client port 1 C1 client port 1
C2 operating states of the client port 2 C2 client port 2
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

NE operating states of the network port East NE network port East


NW operating states of the network port West NW network port West

Document Version 7.1.5 3-33


Hardware Description

Description The 2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5 is an access type, 2-port multirate TDM channel


module. It features two client and two network Small Form-factor Plug-
gable (SFP) MSA compliant interfaces. The SFP transceivers use LC con-
nectors for fiber termination.
The module is designed for transport of 2 x GbE or 2 x 1G FC over a specific
ITU-T compliant wavelength between the ingress and egress node. It is
possible to mix these services such as 1 x GbE and 1 x 1G FC. The trans-
mission of the client signals in transparent mode is supported.
At the network port a proprietary protocol runs with a data rate of
2.48832 Gbit/s. Due to its dual network interface, the module can be used
to create channel protection and versatile switched protection.
The module is configurable for up to 80 DWDM channels on the 100 GHz
wavelength grid or for up to 8 CWDM channels on the 20 nm wavelength
grid. Internal loop backs or external loop backs are supported on both the
client ports and on the network ports. Each port can be looped back in-
dividually.

Features • Channel protection


• Versatile switched protection (in conjunction with the RSM-SF, RSM-
OLM and VSM)
• ALS according to ADVA standard on the network ports
• Clock and data recovery with 3R conditioning at any supported data
rate by default
• Implementation of media conversion (multimode to single-mode or
copper to fiber and vice versa)
• Performance monitoring on the network ports
• Standard FEC according to ITU-T G.709 is not provided
• Internal loop backs or external loop backs on the client and network
ports

Client interface • Two independent, Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) MSA compliant
characteristics: interfaces using LC connectors for fiber termination
• Data rates: 1.0625 Gbit/s and 1.25 Gbit/s
• In transparent mode transmission of GbE, 1G FC, FICON
• Support of
• 850 nm and 1310 nm intra-office reach
• 1310 nm standard and long reach
• CWDM long and very-long reach

850 nm types SFP/HS/850I/MM/LC


SFP/2G1/850I/MM/LC
1310 nm types SFP/HS/1310S/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/1310S/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/1310L/SM/LC
CWDM types SFP/2G5U/CxxxxL/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/CxxxxV/SM/LC
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

3-34 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5

Network interface • Two independent, Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) MSA compliant
characteristics: interfaces using LC connectors for fiber termination
• Data rates: 2.48832 Gbit/s
• Proprietary ECC functionality
• Support of
• 1310 nm intra-office reach
• 1310 nm standard and long reach
• CWDM long and very-long reach
• DWDM ultra-long and very-long reach

1310 nm types SFP/HS/1310S/SM/LC


SFP/2G5U/1310S/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/1310L/SM/LC
CWDM types SFP/2G5U/CxxxxL/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/CxxxxV/SM/LC
DWDM types SFP/2G5U/Dxxxx.xxU/SM/LC#Dxx
SFP/2G5U/Dxxxx.xxV/SM/LC#Dxx

SFP transceivers SFP cages should only be populated with ADVA-approved SFP transceivers.
If you use non-ADVA approved SFPs in conjunction with channel modules,
ADVA cannot guarantee the behavior of the module. When a client port
is not used, the corresponding SFP cage does not need to be populated
with an SFP transceiver.

Signal Path Figure 3-34, p. 3-35 shows the functional block diagram (very simplified)
and illustrates the signal path when the module is operating in channel
protection mode.
CWDM CWDM/DWDM
850/1310 nm
2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5 1310 nm Network
Client
port C2 SFP transceiver electronic regime SFP transceiver port West
Rx Tx
R-2 o e T-NW
3R
e o
o MUX
e
3R
T-2 e o R-NW
3R
Tx decision Rx
logic
Rx Tx
R-1 o e T-NE
e DEMUX o
o e
3R
T-1 e o R-NE
Tx TDM Rx
Client CWDM CWDM/DWDM Network
port C1 850/1310 nm 1310 nm port East
SFP transceiver SFP transceiver
Transmit direction Active signal path
Receive direction
Fig. 3-34: 2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5 Functional Block Diagram

Transmit direction In the transmit (ingress) direction, the following takes place:
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

Each client port receiver (Rx) receives the optical signals from the CPE
through the C1-R and C2-R connectors. These signals are converted to

Document Version 7.1.5 3-35


Hardware Description

the electrical domain, and data and clock recovery is performed.


All signals are encoded, synchronized and mapped in a higher bit rate
frame. Using a proprietary method, the mapped signals are then multi-
plexed together to a combined output signal at a data rate of 2.48832
Gbit/s. This combined output signal is routed to SFPs of the East and West
network ports (NE, NW) respectively. Each transmitter (Tx) converts the
electrical output signal back to an optical signal at a specific DWDM wave-
length and transmits it through the NW-T and NE-T connectors onto the
link.

Receive direction In the receive (egress) direction, the following takes place:
The network port receivers (Rx) receive signals at a specific DWDM wave-
length through the NW-R and NE-R connectors from the link. These sig-
nals are converted to the electrical domain and data and clock recovery
is performed. The signals from the two links are monitored continuously.
If one of the receivers (Rx) detects a loss of signal, the decision logic
based on a set of switching criteria initiates the automatic switch-over,
provided a signal is available on the other receiver.
The signal is directed to the DEMUX section where the proprietary frame
is demultiplexed into its original component client signals. Each client
signal is decoded, serialized and fed into the SFP transceiver of the cor-
responding client port. The transmitters (Tx) convert the electrical signals
back to optical signals and transmit them through the client port connec-
tors C1-T and C2-T to the CPE.

Placement The 2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5 is 4 HP wide. It can be placed in any 5 HU slot of


the 7HU Shelf and the appropriate slots of the 1HU Slimline Shelf.

LED Indicators Different LED indicators provide a quick visual check of the operating sta-
tus of the module and its ports. For details, refer to the Troubleshooting
Guide, Chapter 3”, p. 3-1.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 3-35, Figure 3-36 and Figure 3-37.

Module Type Label Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5

Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Port Type: SFP SFP xxxxxxxxxxxx
Support Data Rate [Gbit/s]: 2.488 1.0625,
1.250
Laser Module

Fig. 3-35: Example of a 2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5 Module Type Label


HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

3-36 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 3-36: Example of a 2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5 Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 3-37: Example of a 2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5 Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 3-37


Hardware Description

3.10 2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5
Variants:
Module name
none
Serial number
Status LED indicators

Transmitter connector (C2-T) for client signal


output
Receiver connector (C2-R) for client signal input

Transmitter connector (C1-T) for client signal


output
Receiver connector (C1-R) for client signal input

Transmitter connector (NW-T) for network signal


output (line West)
Receiver connector (NW-R) for network signal in-
put (line West)

Transmitter connector (NE-T) for network signal


output (line East)
Receiver connector (NE-R) for network signal in-
put (line East)

Item number

Fig. 3-38: 2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5 Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 3-11 lists all abbreviations on the 2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5 faceplate
and their meanings.

Table 3-11: 2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5 Faceplate Markings


LED Indicators Optical Ports
P module’s power supply status T transmit
Mod module’s operating states R receive
C1 operating states of the client port 1 C1 client port 1
C2 operating states of the client port 2 C2 client port 2
NE operating states of the network port East NE network port East
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

NW operating states of the network port West NW network port West

3-38 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5

Description The 2TCA-PCN-622+2G5 is an access type, 2-port multirate TDM channel


module. It features two client and two network Small Form-factor Plug-
gable (SFP) MSA compliant interfaces.
This module supports signals with a data rate of 622 Mbit/s at the client
ports. The transmission of the client signals in transparent mode is sup-
ported.
At the network port a proprietary protocol runs with a data rate of
2.48832 Gbit/s. The module provides clock and data recovery to support
2xSTM-4/2xOC-12 services. Due to its dual network interface, the module
can be used to create channel protection and versatile switched protec-
tion.
The module is configurable for up to 80 DWDM channels on the 100 GHz
wavelength grid or for up to 8 CWDM channels on the 20 nm wavelength
grid. Internal loop backs or external loop backs are supported on both the
client ports and on the network ports. Each port can be looped back in-
dividually.

Features • Channel protection


• Versatile switched protection (in conjunction with the RSM-SF, RSM-
OLM and VSM)
• ALS according to ADVA standard on the network ports
• Clock and data recovery with 3R conditioning at any supported data
rate by default
• Implementation of media conversion (multimode to single-mode or
copper to fiber and vice versa)
• Performance monitoring on the network ports
• Standard FEC according to ITU-T G.709 is not provided
• Internal loop backs or external loop backs on the client and network
ports

Client interface • Two independent, Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) MSA compliant
characteristics: interfaces using LC connectors for fiber termination
• Data rates: 622.08 Mbit/s
• In transparent mode transmission of 2xSTM-4/2xOC-12
• Support of
• 850 and 1310 nm intra-office reach
• 1310 nm standard and long reach
• CWDM long and very-long reach

850 nm types SFP/HS/850I/MM/LC


SFP/2G1/850I/MM/LC
1310 nm types SFP/HS/1310S/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/1310S/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/1310L/SM/LC
CWDM types SFP/2G5U/CxxxxL/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/CxxxxV/SM/LC
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 3-39


Hardware Description

Network interface • Two independent, Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) MSA compliant
characteristics: interfaces using LC connectors for fiber termination
• Data rates: 2.48832 Gbit/s
• Proprietary ECC functionality
• Support of
• 1310 nm intra-office, standard and long reach
• CWDM long and very-long reach
• DWDM ultra-long and very-long reach

1310 nm types SFP/CL/1310I/SM/LC


SFP/2G5U/1310S/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/1310L/SM/LC
CWDM types SFP/2G5U/CxxxxL/SM/LC
SFP/2G5U/CxxxxV/SM/LC
DWDM types SFP/2G5U/Dxxxx.xxU/SM/LC#Dxx
SFP/2G5U/Dxxxx.xxV/SM/LC#Dxx

SFP transceivers SFP cages should only be populated with ADVA-approved SFP transceivers.
If you use non-ADVA approved SFPs in conjunction with channel modules,
ADVA cannot guarantee the behavior of the module. When a client port
is not used, the corresponding SFP cage does not need to be populated
with an SFP transceiver.

Signal Path Figure 3-39, p. 3-40 shows the functional block diagram (very simplified)
and illustrates the signal path when the module is operating in channel
protection mode.

CWDM CWDM/DWDM
850/1310 nm
2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5 1310 nm Network
Client
port C2 SFP transceiver electronic regime SFP transceiver port West
Rx Tx
R-2 o e T-NW
3R
e o
o MUX
e
3R
T-2 e 3R
o R-NW
Tx decision
Rx
logic
Rx Tx
R-1 o e T-NE
e DEMUX o
o e
3R
T-1 e o R-NE
Tx TDM Rx
Client CWDM CWDM/DWDM Network
port C1 850/1310 nm 1310 nm port East
SFP transceiver SFP transceiver

Transmit direction Active signal path


Receive direction
Fig. 3-39: 2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5 Functional Block Diagram
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

3-40 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5

Transmit direction In the transmit (ingress) direction, the following takes place:
Each client port receiver (Rx) receives the optical signals from the CPE
through the C1-R and C2-R connectors. These signals are converted to
the electrical domain, and data and clock recovery is performed. All sig-
nals are synchronized and mapped in a higher bit rate frame. Using a pro-
prietary method, the mapped signals are then multiplexed together to a
combined output signal at a data rate of 2.48832 Gbit/s. This combined
output signal is routed to SFP transceivers of the East and West network
ports (NE, NW) respectively. Each transmitter (Tx) converts the electrical
output signal back to an optical signal at a specific DWDM wavelength
and transmits it through the NW-T and NE-T connectors onto the link.

Receive direction In the receive (egress) direction, the following takes place:
The network port receivers (Rx) receive signals at a specific DWDM wave-
length through the NW-R and NE-R connectors from the link. These sig-
nals are converted to the electrical domain and data and clock recovery
is performed. The signals from the two links are monitored continuously.
If one of the receivers (Rx) detects a loss of signal, the decision logic
based on a set of switching criteria initiates the automatic switch-over,
provided a signal is available on the other receiver.
The signal is directed to the DEMUX section where the proprietary frame
is demultiplexed into its original component client signals.
Each client signal is serialized and fed into the SFP transceiver of the cor-
responding client port. The transmitters (Tx) convert the electrical signals
back to optical signals and transmit them through the client port connec-
tors C1-T and C2-T to the CPE.

LED Indicators Different LED indicators provide a quick visual check of the operating
status of the module and its ports. For details, refer to the Troubleshoot-
ing Guide, Chapter 3”, p. 3-1.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 3-40, Figure 3-41 and Figure 3-42.

Module Type Label Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5

Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Port Type: SFP SFP xxxxxxxxxxxx
Support Data Rate [Gbit/s]: 2.488 0.622

Laser Module

Fig. 3-40: Example of a 2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5 Module Type Label


HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 3-41


Hardware Description

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 3-41: Example of a 2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5 Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 3-42: Example of a 2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5 Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.

HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

3-42 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx

3.11 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx
Variants:
4TCA-LS-1G3 Channel module name
V#D01 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#D01
S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx
Serial number to
4TCA-LS+1G3-V#D64
Status LED indicators
4TCA-LS+1G3-V#DC1
to
Receiver connector (C4-R) for client
4TCA-LS+1G3-V#DC8
signal input
Transmitter connector (C4-T) for cli-
ent signal output 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#DL1
to
The description of the client interface 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#DL8
C4 applies for the client interfaces C1
to C3 accordingly.

Transmitter connector (N-T) for net-


work signal output
Receiver connector (N-R) for network
signal input

Item number
P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx

Fig. 3-43: 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx Front View

The 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx is a converted FSP 2000 Release 6.2 module as


indicated by the asterisk printed on its faceplate. The module provides
full FSP 2000 Release 6.2 functionality. Monitoring and troubleshooting
follow FSP 2000 Release 6.2 rules. This mainly concerns ALS and LED
behavior.

Faceplate Markings Table 3-12 and Table 3-13, p. 3-44 list all abbreviations on the
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx faceplate and their meanings.

Document Version 7.1.5 3-43


Hardware Description

Optical Port Markings


Table 3-12: 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx Optical Port Markings
Optical Ports Meaning
R receive
T transmit
C1 client port 1
C2 client port 2
C3 client port 3
C4 client port 4
N network port

LED Indicator There are two LED indicators per port. One displays the status of the
Markings transmitter and the other the status of the receiver of the corresponding
port.
Table 3-13: 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx LED Indicator Markings
LEDs Meaning LEDs Meaning
C1/R receiver status of the client C1/T transmitter status of the
port 1 client port 1
C2/R receiver status of the client C2/T transmitter status of the
port 2 client port 2
C3/R receiver status of the client C3/T transmitter status of the
port 3 client port 3
C4/R receiver status of the client C4/T transmitter status of the
port 4 client port 4
N/R receiver status of the network N/T transmitter status of the
port network port
On module’s power supply status Err error condition; self-test
procedure

Description The 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx is an access type 4-port low-speed TDM channel


module specifically designed for the use in DWDM transport systems with
very-long distance transmission. The module has four integrated short-
reach, 1310-nm interfaces on the client side. On the network side, it fea-
tures a single integrated very-long reach, 100 GHz-spaced DWDM inter-
face. The module is available in 80 variants, one for each of the 80 FSP
3000R7 DWDM channels it supports. For fiber termination, all interfaces
use MU/PC simplex receptacles (also called MiniSC) on the faceplate. The
Tx connectors of the client ports accept single-mode fibers and the Rx
connectors take multimode fibers.
The 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx is intended for transport of FE, STM-1, OC-3, ATM
155 and ESCON at data rates of 125, 155 and 200 Mbit/s over a specific
ITU-T compliant wavelength between the ingress and egress node. It is
possible to mix the specified client services such as 2 x ESCON, 1 x STM-
1 and 1 x ATM 155. Unused client interfaces do not affect operation of
the terminated services.
The module provides clock recovery and performs 3R signal conditioning
by default. The clock recovery of the network port is fixed to the clock
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

frequency 1.25 Gbit/s.


The 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx supports performance monitoring on the optical
layer only.

3-44 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx

The module supports parallel loop functionality on the client ports, that
is all four client channels are looped back simultaneously. Loop back op-
erations on the network port are not supported.

Signal Path Figure 3-44 shows the functional block diagram (simplified) and illus-
trates the signal path, which is described below.

4 x multirate CDR
Client 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx
ports CDR
Rx
C1-R o
e
C1 o CDR
C1-T e
Tx
Network
MUX port N
CDR
Rx Rx N-T
C2-R o e
e o
C2 o CDR
C2-T e
Tx

Rx
C3-R o
e e
C3 o CDR o
e Tx
N-R
C3-T
Tx
1250 Mbit/s
DEMUX fixed clock

Rx
C4-R o
e
C4 o
C4-T e
Tx

TDM

Transmit direction
Receive direction

Fig. 3-44: 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx Functional Block Diagram (Simplified)

Transmit direction In the transmit (ingress) direction, the following takes place:
Each client port receiver (Rx) receives the optical signals from the CPE
through the client port connectors C1-R, C2-R, C3-R and C4-R. These sig-
nals are converted to the electrical domain and clock and data recovery
is performed. All signals are encoded, synchronized and mapped in a
higher bit rate frame. Using a proprietary method, the mapped signals are
then electronically multiplexed together to a combined output signal at
a data rate of 1.25 Gbit/s. This combined signal is routed to the trans-
mitter (Tx) of the network port. The transmitter converts the electrical
output signal back to an optical signal at a specific DWDM wavelength
and transmits it through the N-T connector onto the link.

Receive direction In the receive (egress) direction, the following takes place:
The network port receiver (Rx) receives the signal at a specific DWDM
wavelength through the N-R connector from the link. This signal is con-
verted to the electrical domain and clock and data recovery is performed.
In the DEMUX section, the input signal is demultiplexed into its original
component client signals.
Each client signal is decoded, serialized and fed into the transmitter (Tx)
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

of the corresponding client port. The transmitters convert the electrical


signals back to optical signals and transmit them through the client port
connectors C1-T, C2-T, C3-T and C4-T to the CPE.

Document Version 7.1.5 3-45


Hardware Description

Placement The 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx is 8 HP wide and therefore occupies two regular


slots. It can be placed in any 5 HU slot of the 7HU Shelf and the appro-
priate slots of the 1HU Slimline Shelf.

LED Indicators Different LED indicators provide a quick visual check of the operating sta-
tus of the module and its ports. For details, refer to the Troubleshooting
Guide, Chapter 3”, p. 3-1.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 3-45, Figure 3-46 and Figure 3-47.

Module Type Label Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
4TCA-LS+1G3-V
#D01 Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Output Power Range: +4 to +6 dBm -15 to -8 dBm xxxxxxxxxxxx
Receiver Dynamic Range: -30 to -10 dBm -28 to -8 dBm
Wavelength: 1529.55 nm/SM 1310 nm/MM
Support Data Rate [Mbit/s]: 1250 125,
155
200
Laser Module

Fig. 3-45: Example of a 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx Module Type Label

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 3-46: Example of a 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 3-47: Example of a 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx Warranty Label
HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.

3-46 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Cxxxx

3.12 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Cxxxx
The 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Cxxxx is an access type 4-port TDM channel module
specifically designed for the use in CWDM transport systems and very-long
distance transmission. It has the same design, functionality and appear-
ance as the 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx. Therefore, the description in Section
3.11 “4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx”, p. 3-43 adequately applies to the 4TCA-
LS+1G3-V#Cxxxx.
The only difference is that the 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Cxxxx features an ITU-T
compliant, 20 nm spaced CWDM interface allowing support for 8-channel
CWDM networks via 8 discrete module variants. However, the maximum
realizable fiber link distances are shorter in comparison to the 4TCA-
LS+1G3-V#Dxx.
The 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Cxxxx works only in conjunction with the appropriate
CWDM optical filter modules. It cannot be deployed in topologies with op-
tical amplifiers.

Variants • 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#C1470
• 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#C1490
• 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#C1510
• 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#C1530
• 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#C1550
• 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#C1570
• 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#C1590
• 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#C1610

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 3-48, Figure 3-49 and Figure 3-50.

Module Type Label Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
4TCA-LS+1G3-V
#C1470
Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Output Power Range: +2 to +2 dBm -15 to -8 dBm xxxxxxxxxxxx
Receiver Dynamic Range: -30 to -10 dBm -28 to -8 dBm
Wavelength: 1471 nm/SM 1310 nm/MM
Support Data Rate [Mbit/s]: 1250 125,
155
200
Laser Module

Fig. 3-48: Example of a 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Cxxxx Module Type Label


HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 3-47


Hardware Description

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 3-49: Example of a 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Cxxxx Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 3-50: Example of a 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Cxxxx Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.

HWD_3_ChMod_acc.fm

3-48 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


Chapter 4
Enterprise Type Channel Modules
This chapter contains the descriptions of all enterprise type channel mod-
ules available at the publication date of this Hardware Description.
Each description includes the front view of the module, the explanation
of the ports, the simplified block diagram and module specific details.
Moreover, the module’s key features are presented, the signal path within
the module is briefly discussed, and an example of the module’s labeling
are given.
For all matters relating to module management, installation, trouble-
shooting and safety, refer to the Detailed Procedures, Detailed System De-
scription, User Guide, Installation Guide and Safety Guide.

This chapter includes the following module descriptions:


4.1 WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx
4.2 WCE-LS-T-V#Cxxxx
4.3 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx
4.4 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Cxxxx
HWD_4_ChMod_ent.fm

FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description Document Version 7.1.5 4-1


Hardware Description

Identification Enterprise channel modules are identified by faceplate codes and the la-
bel printed on the board cover. Identification information is provided in
each module description.

Naming Enterprise type WDM channel modules are named WCEs and enterprise
Conventions type x-Port TDM channel modules are designated xTCEs. Otherwise the no-
menclature of enterprise type channel modules follows the basic rules of
the naming conventions as described in Chapter 2”, p. 2-1 and Chapter 3”,
p. 3-1.

General WCEs and xTCEs are cost-optimized modules intended to be used in enter-
prise networks. When operated within the outlined specifications, these
modules will be capable of a 100 km reach without using optical amplifi-
cation, dispersion compensation or digital signal regeneration. WCEs and
xTCEs typically do not support standard FEC functionality according to
ITU-T G.709 and in-band DCN management.
Module Design Enterprise type channel modules are designed as single-slot or two-slot
plug-in modules that are compatible with any 7HU Shelf (SH7HU) or 1HU
Slimline Shelf (SH1HU).
Enterprise type channel modules only have integrated (non-pluggable)
transceivers for the client and network interfaces. The optical receptacles
are angled at 45° to preserve minimum fiber bend radii when connecting
the optical cables.
Enterprise type channel modules described below have special EMC con-
tact strips attached to them, which creates a tight seal with neighboring
modules. The EMC contact strips avoid unintended propagation of elec-
tromagnetic energy towards the external environment that might disrupt
other equipment.
Module Handling WCEs and xTCEs are electrostatic sensitive modules. Therefore they must
be handled with care. For information on module handling, refer to the
Detailed Procedures.

Management and Using the Network Element Control Unit (NCU), all enterprise type chan-
Operating Status nel modules are SNMP manageable and fully supported through the Net-
work Management System (NMS). Management allows user access to
module conditions as well as network status. The status of receivers and
transmitters can either be read off the faceplate LED indicators or ob-
served with SNMP-based network management tools. Commands for con-
trolling and status query are transmitted via the internal system bus
between the channel modules and the NCU.

LED Indicators All enterprise type channel modules have tri-color LED indicators that are
visible through the faceplates. Their colors display different operating
states. The status that each color of the LED indicators represents is de-
scribed in the Troubleshooting Guide.

Labeling Enterprise type channel modules have several printed labels (module type
label, certification label and warranty label) on the board cover, which
HWD_4_ChMod_ent.fm

contain specific module information. The labels of the individual modules


are shown in the appropriate module descriptions.

4-2 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


Module Type Label This label contains module information, such as
• the name of the module
• the module type
• the serial number and its bar code
• the item number and its bar code
• technical specifications (channel number, output power range,
receiver dynamic range, wavelength and supported data rates of the
module)

Certification Label This label provides approved certification marks.

Warranty Label Damage or removal of the warranty label will void the warranty.
ADVA AG Optical Networking will disclaim the implied warranty of mer-
chantability.
HWD_4_ChMod_ent.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 4-3


Hardware Description

4.1 WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx
Variants:
WCE-LS-T Module name WCE-LS-T-V#D01
V#D01

to
S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx Serial number
WCE-LS-T-V#D64

WCE-LS-T-V#DC1
Status LED indicators
to
WCE-LS-T-V#DC8

Receiver connector (C-R) for client signal input WCE-LS-T-V#DL1


Transmitter connector (C-T) for client signal to
output
WCE-LS-T-V#DL8

Receiver connector (N-R) for network signal input


Transmitter connector (N-T) for network signal
output

Item number

P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx

Fig. 4-1: WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx Front View

The WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx is a converted FSP 2000 Release 6.2 module as


indicated by the asterisk printed on its faceplate. The module provides
full FSP 2000 Release 6.2 functionality. Monitoring and troubleshooting
follow FSP 2000 Release 6.2 rules. This mainly concerns ALS and LED
behavior.

Faceplate Markings Table 4-1 and Table 4-2, p. 4-5 list all abbreviations on the
HWD_4_ChMod_ent.fm

WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx faceplate and their meanings.

4-4 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx

Optical Port Markings


Table 4-1: WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx Optical Port Markings
Optical Port Markings Meaning
R receive
T transmit
C client port
N network port

LED Indicator There are two LED indicators per port. One displays the status of the
Markings transmitter and the other the status of the receiver.
Table 4-2: WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx LED Indicator Markings
LED Markings Meaning
On/Err operating status of the module/error condition
Loop looping back on the client port or network port
C/R receiver status of the client port
C/T transmitter status of the client port
N/R receiver status of the network port
N/T transmitter status of the network port 5

Description The WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx is an enterprise type low-speed transparent channel


module. It converts optical client signals to specific ITU-T compliant
wavelengths necessary for DWDM and vice versa. The WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx is
network protocol transparent. Clocking is not supported. The module is
available in 80 variants, one for each of the 80 FSP 3000R7 DWDM chan-
nels it supports.

Features • Full-duplex rate-independent 2R signal regeneration


• ALS according to ADVA standard on the network port
• Versatile switched protection (in conjunction with the VSM)
• Performance monitoring on the optical layer only
• Internal and external loop backs on the client port and network port

Client interface • Integrated, 1310-nm multimode interface


characteristics • Support of Sysplex Timer, ESCON, Ethernet, FDDI, FE, STM-1/OC-3
and ATM 155
• Data rates in the range from 8 Mbit/s to 200 Mbit/s
• MU/PC type receptacles

Network interface • Integrated, very-long reach DWDM interface (100 GHz wavelength
characteristics grid)
• Data rates in the range from 8 Mbit/s to 200 Mbit/s
• MU/PC type receptacles
HWD_4_ChMod_ent.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 4-5


Hardware Description

Signal Path Figure 4-2, p. 4-6 shows the functional block diagram (simplified) and il-
lustrates the signal path, which is described below.

Rx
WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx Tx
C-R o e N-T
e o

Tx Rx
o e
C-T e o N-R

Client Network
port C port N
Transmit direction
Receive direction
Fig. 4-2: WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx Functional Block Diagram

Transmit direction In the transmit (ingress) direction, the following takes place:
The client port receiver (Rx) receives the optical signal through the C-R
connector from the CPE. This signal is converted to the electrical domain
and routed to the transmitter (Tx) of the network port. The transmitter
converts the electrical output signal back to an optical signal at a specific
DWDM wavelength and transmits it through the N-T connector onto the
link.

Receive direction In the receive (egress) direction, the following takes place:
The network port receiver (Rx) receives the signal at a specific DWDM
wavelength through the N-R connector from the link. This signal is con-
verted to the electrical domain and routed to the transmitter (Tx) of the
client port. The transmitter converts the electrical signal back to an op-
tical one and transmits it through the client port connector C-T to the
CPE.

Placement The WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx is 4 HP wide. It can be placed in any 5 HU slot of


the 7HU Shelf and the appropriate slots of the 1HU Slimline Shelf.

LED Indicators Different LED indicators provide a quick visual check of the operating sta-
tus of the module and its ports. For details, refer to the Troubleshooting
Guide, Chapter 3”, p. 3-1.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 4-3, Figure 4-4 and Figure 4-5.
HWD_4_ChMod_ent.fm

4-6 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx

Module Type Label


Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
WCE-LS+1G3-V
#D01
Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Output Power Range: +4 to +6 dBm -21 to -16 dBm xxxxxxxxxxxx
Receiver Dynamic Range: -28 to -5 dBm -28 to -5 dBm
Wavelength: 1529.55 nm/SM 1260 nm/MM
Support Data Rate [Mbit/s]: 8 to 200 8 to 200
Laser Module

Fig. 4-3: Example of a WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx Module Type Label

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 4-4: Example of a WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 4-5: Example of a WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_4_ChMod_ent.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 4-7


Hardware Description

4.2 WCE-LS-T-V#Cxxxx
The WCE-LS-T-V#Cxxxx is an enterprise type low-speed transparent chan-
nel module specifically designed for the use in CWDM transport systems.
It has the same design, functionality and appearance as the WCE-LS-T-
V#Dxx. Therefore, the description in Section 4.1 “WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx”, p. 4-4
adequately applies to the WCE-LS-T-V#Cxxxx.
The only difference is that the WCE-LS-T-V#Cxxxx features an ITU-T com-
pliant, 20 nm spaced CWDM interface allowing support for 8-channel
CWDM networks via 8 discrete module variants. However, the maximum
realizable fiber link distances are shorter in comparison to the WCE-LS-T-
V#Dxx.
The WCE-LS-T-V#Cxxxx works only in conjunction with the appropriate
CWDM optical filter modules. It cannot be deployed in topologies with op-
tical amplifiers.

Variants • WCE-LS-T-V#C1470
• WCE-LS-T-V#C1490
• WCE-LS-T-V#C1510
• WCE-LS-T-V#C1530
• WCE-LS-T-V#C1550
• WCE-LS-T-V#C1570
• WCE-LS-T-V#C1590
• WCE-LS-T-V#C1610

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 4-6, Figure 4-7 and Figure 4-8.

Module Type Label


Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
WCE-LS+1G3-V
#C1470
Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Output Power Range: +4 to +6 dBm -21 to -16 dBm xxxxxxxxxxxx
Receiver Dynamic Range: -28 to -5 dBm -28 to -5 dBm
Wavelength: 1471 nm/SM 1260 nm/MM
Support Data Rate [Mbit/s]: 8 to 200 8 to 200

Laser Module

Fig. 4-6: Example of a WCE-LS-T-V#Cxxxx Module Type Label


HWD_4_ChMod_ent.fm

4-8 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


WCE-LS-T-V#Cxxxx

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 4-7: Example of a WCE-LS-T-V#Cxxxx Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 4-8: Example of a WCE-LS-T-V#Cxxxx Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_4_ChMod_ent.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 4-9


Hardware Description

4.3 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx
Variants:
8TCE-ESCON-2G5
V#D01 Channel module name 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#D01
to
Status LED indicators 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#D64

Serial number 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#DC1


S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx
to
Receiver connector (C8-R) for 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#DC8
client signal input
Transmitter connector (C8-T) for
client signal output 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#DL1
to

The description of the client interface 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#DL8


C8 applies for the client interfaces
C1 to C7 accordingly.

Transmitter connector (N-T) for


network signal output
Receiver connector (N-R) for
network signal input

Item number
P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx

Fig. 4-9: 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx Front View

The 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx is a converted FSP 2000 Release 6.2 module


as indicated by the asterisk printed on its faceplate. The module provides
full FSP 2000 Release 6.2 functionality. Monitoring and troubleshooting
follow FSP 2000 Release 6.2 rules. This mainly concerns ALS and LED
behavior.

Faceplate Markings Table 4-3 and Table 4-4, p. 4-11 list all abbreviations on the
HWD_4_ChMod_ent.fm

8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx faceplate and their meanings.

4-10 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx

Optical Port Markings


Table 4-3: 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx Optical Port Markings
Optical Port Markings Meaning
R receive
T transmit
C1 client port 1
C2 client port 2
C3 client port 3
C4 client port 4
C5 client port 5
C6 client port 6
C7 client port 7
C8 client port 8
N network port

LED Indicator There are two LED indicators per port. One displays the status of the
Markings transmitter and the other the status of the receiver of the corresponding
port.
Table 4-4: 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx LED Indicator Markings
LED LED
Markings Meaning Markings Meaning
R receive T transmit
C1-R receiver status of the client C1-T transmitter status of the
port 1 client port 1
C2-R receiver status of the client C2-T transmitter status of the
port 2 client port 2
C3-R receiver status of the client C3-T transmitter status of the
port 3 client port 3
C4-R receiver status of the client C4-T transmitter status of the
port 4 client port 4
C5-R receiver status of the client C5-T transmitter status of the
port 5 client port 5
C6-R receiver status of the client C6-T transmitter status of the
port 6 client port 6
C7-R receiver status of the client C7-T transmitter status of the
port 7 client port 7
C8-R receiver status of the client C8-T transmitter status of the
port 8 client port 8
N/R receiver status of the network N/T transmitter status of the
port network port
On module’s power supply status Err error condition; self-test
procedure

Description The 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx is an enterprise type 8-port TDM channel


module especially designed for the transport of up to eight 200 Mbit/s
HWD_4_ChMod_ent.fm

ESCON services in DWDM networks. The module electrically multiplex-


es/demultiplexes the client signals into/from one WDM channel carried
over a specific ITU-T compliant wavelength.

Document Version 7.1.5 4-11


Hardware Description

The module is available in 80 variants, one for each of the 80 FSP 3000R7
DWDM channels it supports.

Features • Clock and data recovery with 3R signal conditioning


• ALS according to ADVA standard on the network port
• Versatile switched protection (in conjunction with the VSM)
• Performance monitoring on the optical layer only
• Parallel loop functionality on the client ports
• Loop back operations on the network port are not supported.

Client interface • Eight independent, integrated, 1310-nm multimode interfaces


characteristics • Support of ESCON protocol only
• Data rate of 200 Mbit/s
• MU/PC duplex receptacles

Network interface • Integrated, very-long reach DWDM interface (100 GHz wavelength
characteristics grid)
• Fixed data rate of 2.5 Gbits/s
• MU/PC duplex receptacles
Signal Path Figure 4-10, p. 4-13 shows the functional block diagram (simplified) and
illustrates the signal path.

Transmit direction In the transmit (ingress) direction, the following takes place:
Each client port receiver (Rx) receives the optical signals from the CPE
through the client port connectors C1-R to C8-R. These signals are con-
verted to the electrical domain and clock and data recovery is performed.
All signals are encoded, synchronized and mapped in a higher bit rate
frame. Using a proprietary method, the mapped signals are then electron-
ically multiplexed together to a combined output signal at a data rate of
2.5 Gbit/s. This combined signal is routed to the transmitter (Tx) of the
network port. The transmitter converts the electrical output signal back
to an optical signal at a specific DWDM wavelength and transmits it
through the N-T connector onto the link.

Receive direction In the receive (egress) direction, the following takes place:
The network port receiver (Rx) receives the signal at a specific DWDM
wavelength through the N-R connector from the link. This signal is con-
verted to the electrical domain and clock and data recovery is performed.
In the DEMUX section, the input signal is demultiplexed into its original
component client signals. Each client signal is decoded, serialized and
fed into the transmitter (Tx) of the corresponding client port. The trans-
mitters convert the electrical signals back to optical signals and transmit
them through the client port connectors C1-T to C8-T to the CPE.
HWD_4_ChMod_ent.fm

4-12 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx

Client 8 x 200 Mbit/s


8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx TDM
ports
Rx CDR
C1-R o
e
C1 o CDR
C1-T e
Tx
Rx CDR
C2-R o
e
C2 o CDR

MUX
C2-T e
Tx
Rx CDR
C3-R o
e Network
C3 o CDR port N
C3-T e
Tx Rx N-T
Rx CDR e
C4-R o o
e
C4 o CDR
C4-T e
Tx
Rx
C5-R o
e
C5 o e
C5-T e CDR o
Tx N-R
Rx Tx
C6-R o 2500 Mbit/s
e fixed clock
C6 o
C6-T e
Tx

DEMUX
Rx
C7-R o
e
C7 o
C7-T e
Tx
Rx
C8-R o
e
C8 o
C8-T e
Tx

Transmit direction
Receive direction

Fig. 4-10: 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx Functional Block Diagram

Placement The 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx is 8 HP wide and therefore occupies two reg-


ular slots. It can be placed in any 5 HU slot of the 7HU Shelf and the ap-
propriate slots of the 1HU Slimline Shelf.
LED Indicators Different LED indicators provide a quick visual check of the operating sta-
tus of the module and its ports. For details, refer to the Troubleshooting
Guide, Chapter 3”, p. 3-1.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 4-11, Figure 4-12 and Figure 4-13.
HWD_4_ChMod_ent.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 4-13


Hardware Description

Module Type Label


Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V
#D01
Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Output Power Range: +4 to +6 dBm -21 to -14.5 dBm xxxxxxxxxxxx
Receiver Dynamic Range: -28 to -17 dBm -28 to -14 dBm
Wavelength: 1529.55 nm/SM 1270 nm/MM
Support Data Rate [Mbit/s]: 2500 200 ESCON
Laser Module

Fig. 4-11: Example of a 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx Module Type Label

Certification Label

nn ova

This page intentionally left blank

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 4-12: Example of a 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 4-13: Example of a 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_4_ChMod_ent.fm

4-14 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Cxxxx

4.4 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Cxxxx
The 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Cxxxx is an enterprise type 8-port TDM channel
module specifically designed for the use in CWDM transport systems. It
has the same design, functionality and appearance as the
8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx. Therefore, the description in Section 4.3 “8TCE-
ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx”, p. 4-10 adequately applies to the 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-
V#Cxxxx.
The only difference is that the 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Cxxxx features an
ITU-T compliant, 20 nm spaced CWDM interface allowing support for 8-
channel CWDM networks via 8 discrete module variants. However, the
maximum realizable fiber link distances are shorter in comparison to the
8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx.
The 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Cxxxx works only in conjunction with the appro-
priate CWDM optical filter modules. It cannot be deployed in topologies
with optical amplifiers.

Variants • 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#C1470
• 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#C1490
• 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#C1510
• 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#C1530
• 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#C1550
• 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#C1570
• 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#C1590
• 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#C1610

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 4-14, Figure 4-15 and Figure 4-16.

Module Type Label


Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V
#C1470
Serial Number:
Network port Client port
Output Power Range: -2 to +2 dBm -21 to -14.5 dBm xxxxxxxxxxxx
Receiver Dynamic Range: -28 to -10 dBm -29 to -14 dBm
Wavelength: 1529.55 nm/SM 1270 nm/MM
Support Data Rate [Mbit/s]: 2500 200 ESCON
Laser Module

Fig. 4-14: Example of a 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Cxxxx Module Type Label


HWD_4_ChMod_ent.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 4-15


Hardware Description

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 4-15: Example of a 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Cxxxx Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 4-16: Example of a 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Cxxxx Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.

HWD_4_ChMod_ent.fm

4-16 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


Chapter 5
Pluggable Transceivers
This chapter describes the pluggable transceivers in general, discusses
the naming conventions and provides identification information.

Channel modules with interchangeable interfaces use pluggable fiber-op-


tic transceivers or electrical transceivers. The Fiber Service Platform uses
two form factors:
• Small Form-factor Pluggable Transceivers (SFP transceivers) used for
transmission speeds below 10 Gbit/s
• Extended Form-factor Pluggable Transceivers (XFP transceivers) used
for transmission speeds of around 10 Gbit/s
These transceivers comply with the standard dimensions defined by the
SFP/XFP Multi-Sourcing Agreement and meet the requirements of valid
Laser Eye and Electrical Safety Standards. The XFP form factor is not com-
patible with the SFP form factor.
In the following, SFP transceivers and XFP transceivers are referred to as
pluggable transceivers.

Pluggable transceivers must be specifically ordered from ADVA AG Optical


Networking. If ordered, they will be delivered together with the individual
SFP or XFP-based channel module.

All pluggable transceivers are simple to deploy and hot pluggable, allow-
ing channel modules to be changed without an interruption to system
power. They give the end user great flexibility in configuring and recon-
figuring the network at low costs. For all matters relating to safety pre-
cautions as well as insertion and removal procedures, refer to the Safety
Guide and Detailed Procedures.

Handling Normal handling precautions for electrostatic sensitive devices should be


taken.
HWD_5_Transc.fm

FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description Document Version 7.1.5 5-1


Hardware Description

5.1 Identification
Naming The transceiver name is made up of a set of parts assembled according to
Conventions a very specific rule as exemplified below. The parts of the name represent
the transceiver’s specific features.
Example:

This example describes a multirate 2.5 Gbit/s DWDM SFP transceiver for
very-long distance transmission. It supports data rates between 100
Mbit/s and 2.67 Gbit/s and is intended for the DWDM channel no. 01 car-
ried over the wavelength of 1529.55 nm. The transceiver features LC type
connectors supporting single-mode fibers.
Table 5-1 lists the naming conventions used by the FSP 3000R7.

Table 5-1: Pluggable Transceiver Naming Conventions


Parts of the Name Code Meaning
Form of the package SFP small form factor pluggable
XFP extended form factor pluggable
Data rates 10G Depending on the transceiver type e. g.:
9953.2 Mbit/s, 10312.5 Mbit/s,
10518.75 Mbit/s, 10709 Mbit/s
11G between 9953 Mbit/s and 11318 Mbit/s
1.0G 1062.5 Mbit/s
1.3G 1250 Mbit/s
2.5G 2488.32 Mbit/s
2.7G 2700 Mbit/s
2G1 1062 Mbit/s, 1250 Mbit/s and 2125 Mbit/s
2G5 2125 Mbit/s, 2488 Mbit/s and 2500 Mbit/s
2G5U universal data rates between 100 Mbit/s and
2500 Mbit/s
2G7U universal data rates between 100 Mbit/s and
2700 Mbit/s
4GU universal data rates between 1250 Mbit/s and
4250 Mbit/s
CL 1062 Mbit/s and 2125 Mbit/s
HWD_5_Transc.fm

GbE 1250 Mbit/s

5-2 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


Identification

Table 5-1: Pluggable Transceiver Naming Conventions (Forts.)


Parts of the Name Code Meaning
Data rates HS between 100 Mbit/s and 1,250 Mbit/s
universal data rates between 100 Mbit/s and
HSU
1500 Mbit/s
universal data rates between 8 Mbit/s and
LS
200 Mbit/s
STM-4 622 Mbit/s
Wavelengths 850 850 nm
1310 1310 nm
1550 1550 nm unspecified (wide band, grey,...)
C1470, C1490, CWDM wavelengths acc. to ITU-T G694.2
C1590, C1610, CWDM wavelengths acc. to ITU-T G694.2:
C1510, C1530, 1471 nm, 1491 nm, 1591 nm, 1611 nm,
C1550, C1570 1511 nm, 1531 nm, 1591 nm, 1571 nm
D1529.55 to DWDM wavelengths acc. to ITU-TG 694.1,
D1603.17 100 GHz grid compatible
DWDM channels acc. to FSP 3000R7
DWDM channel # #D01 to #D64
wavelength table
Link distance I 0 km to 5 km (0 mi. to 3.1 mi.)
performances S 5 km to 30 km (3.1 mi. to 18.6 mi.)
L 30 km to 70 km (18.6 mi. to 43.4 mi.)
V 70 km to 120 km (43.4 mi. to 74.4 mi.)
U 120 km to 240 km ((74.4 mi. to 148.8 mi.)
R 240 km to 360 km (148.8 mi. to 223.2 mi.)
X 360 km to 600 km (223.2 mi. to 372.0 mi.)
Type of optical fiber SM single-mode fiber G. 652
MM 50 multimode fiber 50 µm, G. 651
MM 62 multimode fiber 62.5 µm, G. 651
Connector type LC LC/PC
RJ RJ-45 (electrical connector)

Color Code For easy and quick identification, the bale-clasp of a pluggable transceiv-
er provides a coloured sleeve. A blue sleeve indicates a long-wavelength
(1310 nm) transceiver and black sleeve points to a short-wave-length
(850 nm) transceiver. See also Figure 5-4 and Figure 5-5, p. 5-6. The bale-
clasps of CWDM SFP transceivers have colored sleeves as well. Each color
e.g. green, red, orange etc. represents a specific CWDM wavelength
(channel). DWDM SFP transceivers have no colored sleeves as shown in
Figure 5-6, p. 5-7.

Labeling Each ADVA-approved pluggable transceiver is clearly labeled by ADVA Op-


tical Networking AG as shown in Figure 5-4, p. 5-6. In addition, there may
be labels from the manufacturer on the narrow side.

ADVA transceiver The ADVA transceiver type label is attached to the top of each pluggable
HWD_5_Transc.fm

type label transceiver. The label displays the transceiver type and other relevant in-
formation as illustrated in Figure 5-1, p. 5-4.

Document Version 7.1.5 5-3


Hardware Description

SFP/2G5U/D1529.55V
TM

Channel
Optical Networking
SM/LC #01
Number

Serial # XX xxxxxxxxxxx
Item # xxxxxxxxxx HW Rev.: x.xx

Fig. 5-1: Example of a DWDM SFP Transceiver Type Label

An example of an electrical SFP transceiver type label is shown in Figure


5-2. This label is slightly different from the other SFP labels as there is
no wavelength, distance performance or channel number:

SFP/GBE/ELECTRICAL
TM

Optical Networking
RJ45

Serial # XX xxxxxxxxxxx
Item # xxxxxxxxxx HW Rev.: x.xx

Fig. 5-2: Example of an Electrical SFP Transceiver Type Label

ADVA Bar Code Label Each pluggable transceiver can be identified by the ADVA bar code label,
which is on the other narrow side of the device as can be seen in Figure
5-4, p. 5-6). This label contains the bar code and item number belonging
to it.

Package Label The cardboard box in which the pluggable transceiver is shipped has a la-
bel like the one in Fig. 8-3. In addition, this label contains:
• the data rates
• the version of the specifications
TM
Item Number:

Optical Networking
Märzenquelle 1-3
98617 Meiningen xxxxxxxxxx
Tel.: +49 3693 450 0
Fax: +49 3693 450 499
Official Name:
SFP/2G5U/D1529.55V
SM/LC#01

HW Revision:
Wavelength: x.xx
1529.55 nm
Serial Number:

Datarates:
155Mbit/s ... 2.67Gbit/s
XXxxxxxxxxxxx

Fig. 5-3: Example of a Package Label (SFP/2G5U/D1529.55V/SM/LC)


HWD_5_Transc.fm

5-4 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


SFP/XFP Optical Transceivers

5.2 SFP/XFP Optical Transceivers


Transceiver Types To support a wide range of applications, the FSP 3000R7 uses a whole set
and Variants of pluggable transceiver types, such as
• Short-wavelength (850 nm)
• Long-wavelength (1310 nm)
• wide band (1550 nm)
• CWDM (available in eight ITU-T compliant wavelengths from
1471 nm to 1611 nm)
• DWDM (available in 80 ITU-T compliant wavelengths on the 100 GHz
grid from 1529.55 nm to 1603.17 nm)
A current list of the pluggable transceiver types and variants approved
and released by ADVA Optical Networking AG can be found in the FSP
3000R7 Module and System Specification.

General Description A pluggable transceiver is a compact, hot-swappable device that performs


both transmitting and receiving functions in full duplex in the same pack-
age. It includes an optical transmitter and receiver pair with or without
clock and data recovery integrated circuit. SFP transceivers physically fit
in any cage of an SFP-based channel module and XFP transceivers in any
cage of an XFP-based channel module.
If a pluggable transceiver is installed and configured, it receives optical
signals from the client equipment or network fiber at the wavelength spe-
cific for the transceiver. Then it performs optical to electrical conversion
and transfers the electrical signals to the relevant circuits on the board
for further processing and transmission. Conversely, the pluggable trans-
ceiver receives electrical signals from the relevant circuits and performs
electrical to optical conversion. Then it transmits the optical signals at
the wavelength specific for the transceiver over optical fibers to the cli-
ent or network interfaces.
Typical data rates for SFP fiber-optic transceivers are up to 4.25 Gbit/s
(4G FC), 2.5 Gbit/s (STM-16/OC-48) and lower. XFP transceivers are used
for applications with a data rate in the range of 10 Gbit/s (10GbE, STM-
64/OC-192).

Features The main features of pluggable fiber-optic transceivers are as follows:


• Class 1 Laser safety compliance
• Low EMI metallic enclosure
• Uncooled or cooled laser transmitter (depending on the type)
• Transmit disable and loss-of signal functions
• Multirate capabilities
• Multi-protocol compliancy
• Very low jitter
• Low power dissipation
• Common mechanical outline for all pluggable transceivers
• On board digital diagnostics that provide remote monitoring
HWD_5_Transc.fm

capability
• Measurements and real-time monitoring of:

Document Version 7.1.5 5-5


Hardware Description

• Tx bias current (analog) [mA]


• Rx optical input power (analog) [dBm]
• Tx optical output power (analog) [dBm]
• Transceiver temperature (analog) [C]
• Transceiver supply voltage (analog) [mV]
• EEPROM of each pluggable transceiver includes information about
the transceiver itself (vendor code, wavelength, data rates and
other relevant factory parameters) as well as ADVA-specific
information (device code, serial number, etc.) so that the user can
query the transceiver to make sure it is the right one for the
intended application.
Figure 5-4 and Figure 5-5 show an example of a fiber-optic SFP transceiver
and an XFP transceiver for the client interface.

Bale-
clasp Host
connectors

Dust Optical Manufacturer labels ADVA SFP transceiver


cover interface type label

Sleeve
(black
colored) ADVA bar
code label

Fig. 5-4: Example of an SFP Transceiver (SFP/2G1/850I/MM/LC)

Dust Host
cover connectors

Manufacturer
label
Optical interface Bale-clasp (blue colored)

ADVA bar
code label

Fig. 5-5: Example of an XFP Transceiver (XFP/10G/1310S/SM/LC)


HWD_5_Transc.fm

Figure 5-6, p. 5-7 shows an example of a DWDM SFP transceiver for the net-
work interface.

5-6 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


SFP/XFP Optical Transceivers

Optical Host
interface connectors

Dust cover

Bale-clasp
(no colored
sleeve)

Fig. 5-6: Example of a DWDM SFP Transceiver

The design of the latching mechanism and dust cover may differ on other
pluggable transceivers.

Optical Connectors Each pluggable transceiver has LC type receive (Rx) and transmit (Tx)
connectors that make up one optical interface. Each pluggable transceiv-
er is supplied with a dust cover for protection of the optical ports and for
optimization of EMI performance.

The dust cover should be left in to prevent contamination of the


Caution optical connectors when not in use or during handling, shipping and
storage of the transceiver.

Management Information about the transceiver itself, the operating status and net-
work operating conditions can be obtained using the management soft-
ware.

Application Notes • Do not use pluggable transceivers from third-party vendors! Use
only pluggable transceivers that are approved by ADVA Optical
Networking AG.
Pluggables-based channel modules identify any transceiver by
means of ADVA-specific information contained in the EEPROM.
It will not be possible to read out any measurement parameters or
module-specific information from the non-ADVA approved pluggable
transceiver.
There is no guarantee regarding behavior for the use of non-ADVA
approved transceivers in conjunction with the channel modules.

You should clearly keep in mind that the use of pluggable


Caution transceivers other than those approved by ADVA AG Optical
Networking will result in loss of safety approval for the FSP.
HWD_5_Transc.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 5-7


Hardware Description

• A disallowed configuration, mismatch, non-acceptance or missing of


pluggable transceivers will be reported by:
- an alarm which is generated and logged by the management
- SNMP traps.
These situations are also indicated by the corresponding port LEDs
of the channel module.

Specifications For information on optical port characteristics of individual pluggable


transceivers, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Specification.

5.3 SFP Electrical Gigabit Ethernet Transceiver


Since the client interface is sometimes a copper interface, it is useful to
have a copper connection option to the WDM system.

The SFP Electrical GbE Transceiver (SFP/GBE/ELECTRICAL/RJ45) provides


1000BASE-T GbE connectivity over a commonly installed Category 6
structured copper cable. Fig. 5-7 depicts this transceiver.

Compact RJ-45 ADVA’s Transceiver Type Label


Connector Assembly will be affixed on the top.

Latching
mechanism

Fig. 5-7: SFP/GBE/ELECTRICAL/RJ45

The receiver and transmitter of the device are packaged in a die cast
metal housing delivering superior EMI and RFI performance. As can be
seen in Fig. 5-7, the front portion of the transceiver is larger than those
of fiber-optic transceivers. This is necessary to accommodate the RJ-45
connector which integrates the magnetic coupling circuitry required by
the Ethernet physical layer specification. The host side of the transceiver
complies with the standard dimensions defined by the SFP MSA. Labeling
corresponds to that of fiber-optic transceivers.

The SFP/GBE/ELECTRICAL/RJ45 only plugs into the SFP cage on the client
side of a channel module. In conjunction with a CWDM or DWDM SFP
transceiver, both installed on the network side of the same channel
module, the SFP/GBE/ELECTRICAL/RJ45 converts from copper to fiber,
and vice versa.
HWD_5_Transc.fm

5-8 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


SFP Electrical Gigabit Ethernet Transceiver

Features • Fiber-port-compliant device that functions properly in any slot


designed for optical SFPs
• 1000 BASE-T operation
• 1.25 Gbit/s bi-directional data links
• Link length up to 100 m (328 ft.) over STP Cat-6 cable
• Loss-of-signal functionality
• No support of any analog values
• Compatible with Gigabit Ethernet and 1000BASE-T standards
(IEEE standard 802.3z-2000 and IEEE standard 802.3ab-1999)
• Conventional RJ45 interface with built-in magnetics for optimized
EMI performance.
• On board digital diagnostics that provide remote monitoring
capability
• EEPROM of each pluggable transceivers includes information about
the transceiver itself (vendor code, wavelength, data rates and
other relevant factory parameters) as well as ADVA-specific
information (device code, serial number, etc.) so that user can
query the transceiver to make sure it is the right one for the
intended application.

Management Information about the transceiver itself, the operating status and
network operating conditions can be obtained using the management
software.

Application Notes • To prevent system problems do not use pluggable electrical trans-
ceivers from third-party vendors! Use only pluggable electrical
transceivers that are approved by ADVA Optical Networking AG.
Pluggables-based channel modules only accept ADVA-approved
electrical transceivers. These channel modules identify any
transceiver by means of ADVA-specific information contained in the
EEPROM.
It will not be possible to read out any module-specific information
from the non-ADVA approved pluggable transceiver.
There is no guarantee on behavior for the use of non-ADVA approved
electrical transceivers in conjunction with CWDM or DWDM SFP
transceivers and with the channel modules.
• A disallowed configuration, mismatch, non-acceptance or missing of
pluggable electrical transceivers will be reported by:
- an alarm which is generated and logged by the management
- SNMP traps.
These situations are also indicated by the corresponding port LEDs
of the channel module.
• A pluggable electrical transceiver must not be directly connected to
metallic tip and ring outside-plant conductors.

Specifications For information on technical details of the transceiver, please refer to FSP
HWD_5_Transc.fm

3000R7 Module and System Specification.

Document Version 7.1.5 5-9


Hardware Description

This page intentionally left blank

HWD_5_Transc.fm

5-10 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


Chapter 6
Management and Switch Modules
This chapter contains the descriptions of all management and switch
modules available at the publication date of this Hardware Description.
Each description includes the front view of the module, the explanation
of the ports and module specific details.
The descriptions of the management modules presents the features and
interfaces.
In the descriptions of the switch modules is a simplified block diagram
given, while the signal path within the module is briefly discussed, and
an example of the module’s labeling are presented.
For all matters relating to module management, installation, trouble-
shooting and safety, refer to the Detailed Procedures, Detailed System De-
scription, User Guide, Installation Guide and Safety Guide.

This chapter includes the following module descriptions:


6.1 NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS
6.2 NCU (NCU2E Type)
6.3 SCU
6.4 VSM
6.5 RSM-OLM#1630
6.6 RSM-SF#1510
6.7 RSM-SF#1310
6.8 OSCM-V#1630
6.9 2OSCM-V#1630
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description Document Version 7.1.5 6-11


Hardware Description

General The management modules enable the management of the network ele-
ments (NE).
• Every NE contains a Network Control Unit (NCU) that provides the
sole management interface to the outside of the NE.
• Every active (managed) shelf contains a Shelf Control Unit (SCU). All
SCUs of an NE are connected by optical links. They connect the NCU
to the modules within the shelf.
• The Optical Supervisory Channel (OSC) allows the transmission of
monitoring information (DCN) over a network fiber independent of
data traffic. A 1630 nm wavelength is used to transmit a 100 Mbit/s
Ethernet signal. These signals outside of the normal filter spectrum
must be added and dropped directly at the network fiber. The OSC
signal is also used for protection purposes in VSM protected links.
• The switching modules are used in protection schemes where only
parts of the optical system are duplicated.
All optical filter modules have special EMC contact strips attached to
them, which creates a tight seal with neighboring modules. The EMC con-
tact strips avoid unintended propagation of electromagnetic energy to-
wards the external environment that might disrupt other equipment.

Faceplate Markings All FSP 3000R7 management modules have different faceplate markings.
LED indicators and optical port markings of the individual modules are ex-
plained in the appropriate module descriptions.

LED Indicators All optical filter modules have tri-color LED indicators that are visible
through the faceplates. The colors of the LED indicator display different
operating states. The status that each color of the LED indicators repre-
sents is described in the Troubleshooting Guide.

Labeling Management and switch modules have several printed labels on the board
cover, which contain specific module information. The labels of the indi-
vidual modules are shown in the appropriate module descriptions.

Module Type Label This label contains module information, such as


• the name of the module
• the module type
• the serial number and its bar code
• the item number and its bar code
• port description
• technical specifications
• certification marks (only for the management modules)

Certification Label One discrete certification label is printed on the board cover of the switch
modules. This label provides approved certification marks. The certifica-
tion marks of the management modules are printed on the module type
label of the individual modules.
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

Warranty Label Damage or removal of the warranty label will void the warranty.
ADVA AG Optical Networking will disclaim the implied warranty of mer-
chantability.

6-12 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS

6.1 NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS

Module name Variants:


NCU-A
NCU-B
Module status LED Serial number NCU-GDPS
indicators
Reset button
Serial port

USB port
Ethernet port with two
LAN port LEDs

Item number

Fig. 6-1: Example of NCU-A Front View

NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS modules uses the same faceplate.

Faceplate Markings Table 6-1 lists all abbreviations on the NCU faceplate and their meanings.
Table 6-1: NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Electrical Ports
P power supply status of the module Ser Serial port
Mod operating states of the module USB USB port
C Ethernet port

Description The Network Element Control Unit (NCU) provides system management ca-
pabilities and network connection to the FSP 3000R7 system. Depending
on the desired capability of the network element (NE), the NCU-A, NCU-
B or NCU-GDPS is used. These module variants have the same basic func-
tionality and design. Therefore, this description applies to all module vari-
ants. Table 6-2, p. 6-14 points out module specific features.
The NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS are single-slot 2.5 HU high plug-in
modules, that act as a hardware interfaces between the different modules
of the system and the equipment connected to their management inter-
faces.
One NCU-A, NCU-B or NCU-GDPS is able to manage a whole NE. Using In-
ternet protocols, such a hardware interface provides management and
configuration capabilities, for example provisioning, alarming and so on.
The NCU-A, NCU-B or NCU-GDPS directly control and monitor the modules
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

in its own shelf (master shelf) and indirectly those in the main shelves
through the Shelf Control Units (SCUs). A NCU communicates with the SCU

Document Version 7.1.5 6-13


Hardware Description

in the master shelf using an internal system bus. Exchange of information


between the SCU in the master shelf and the SCUs in the main shelves
takes place over their fiber ring.
The NCU-A, NCU-B or NCU-GDPS can be accessed through a serial, USB or
Ethernet port via terminal program or Ethernet using telnet, FTP, htpp,
SCP, SNMP, NTP etc. The NCUs’ command line interface allows fast (local)
interaction. External Network Management Systems (NMSs) are supported
using SNMP over the Ethernet interface. External DCN connections can be
provided through embedded communication channels (ECC). Each NCU
variant must be configured for the specific operating environment.
Table 6-2 shows management capabilities of the NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-
GDPS modules.

Table 6-2: NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS Management Capabilities


Features NCU-A NCU-B NCU-GDPS
CWDM support X X X
DWDM support - X X
Hybrid support - X X
WCC /xTCC support (core type) - X X
WCA /xTCA support (access type) X X X
WCE /xTCE support (enterprise type) - - X
FC support - X X
GDPS - X X
X means supported; - means not supported

Functions and The main functions and features of the NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS are:
Features • Registration and deregistration of all inserted modules
• Monitoring of the presence of all inserted modules, the power
supply units and the fan unit
• Detection of component failures
• Error and warning messages
• Bidirectional transmission of management and configuration control
information to/from the NCU to the SCUs to which it is physically
connected using fiber-optic patch cable pairs
• Control of a complete FSP 3000R7 network element consisting of up
to 20 shelves (1 master shelf and 19 main shelves)
• Open platform to connect to any IP based system
• Remote management and configuration of all interconnected shelves
• Furnish SNMP monitoring and trap generation
• Support of up to 5 ECCs
• Reset button to reset the module
• Status LED Indicators on the faceplate
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

• Support of all NE types, such as OTM and OADM

6-14 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS

Interfaces The NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS provide a serial port, USB port and
Ethernet port on their faceplates for management purposes.

Serial Port The serial port (EIA/TIA-232) is a 9-pin D-subminiature male panel con-
nector (SUB-D9). It can be used to run the IP via a Point-to-Point-Proto-
col (PPP) connection, or it may be used for a direct serial connection with
a serial null modem cable (female/female). This port may also be confi-
gured and managed by Service Personnel. The serial port can be disabled.
The SUB-D9 Connector has the following pinout:
Table 6-3: Male SUB-D9 Connector Pinout (NCU-A, NCU-B, NCU-GDPS)
Male SUB-D9 Connector Pin Number Signal Signal Direction
1 CD
2 RXD Receive data
1
6 3 TXD Transmit data
4 DTR Data terminal ready
5 SG Signal ground
6 DSR Data set ready
9 7 RTS Request To Send
5
8 CTS Clear To Send
9 RI Ring indicator

On delivery, the socket of the serial port is equipped with a protective cap
to prevent contamination.

Note that EIA/TIA-232 was formerly known as recommended standard RS-


232 before its acceptance by the Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) and
Note Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA).

Use a serial null modem cable with SUB-D 9 connectors on both ends.

USB Port The USB port is a Mini-AB receptacle that complies with USB 2.0 specifi-
cations. It provides only USB to RS232 emulation. The USB port can be
used for a direct serial connection to a management PC. If necessary, this
port can be disabled.

A USB connection requires a respective driver in the management PC. This


driver is available on the User Documentation Set CD or can be obtained
Note from ADVA.

The Mini-AB receptacle can accept either a Mini-A USB plug or a Mini-B
USB plug, but use only a detachable USB cable with a Mini-A USB plug on
one end and a standard A-plug on the other end.
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

For pinout of the Mini-AB receptacle, see Table 6-4, p. 6-16.

Document Version 7.1.5 6-15


Hardware Description

Table 6-4: Mini-AB USB Type Receptacle Pinout (NCU-A, NCU-B,


NCU-GDPS)
Mini-AB USB Receptacle Pin Function Description
1 V BUS USB power
2 D- Negative Data
signal
3 D+ Positive Data signal
4 ID Identification
5 GND Signal ground

Most of the pins of a Mini-USB connector are the same as a standard USB
connector, except pin 4. Pin 4 is called ID, and is not present in standard
USB plugs. The ID pin identifies which type of plug is connected. This pin
is shorted to ground in the Mini-A plug and unconnected in the Mini-B
plug.

Ethernet Port The Ethernet port is a female RJ-45 receptacle used to connect the NCU-
A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS to the NMS or the management PC via a standard
Ethernet crossover cable. However, in a system equipped with an Optical
Supervisory Channel (OSC), the connection is made at the OSCM instead.
In this case the NCU-A, NCU-B or NCU-GDPS is connected to the Ethernet
switch of the OSCM using a standard Ethernet straight-through cable as
well. After this configuration, one IP address (that on the NCU) is used
for the complete NE.
The ports comply with the IEEE 802.3 10/100BASE-TX and IEEE 802.3u
standards. Each Ethernet port supports
• Data rates of 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s (Fast Ethernet)
• Adjustment of the data rates using the auto-negotiation function
• Enabling/disabling the port
• Data Communications Equipment (DCE) according to IEEE 802.3
(automatic MDI/MDI-X crossover capabilities)
• Half/full duplex mode
See Table 6-5 for the Ethernet port pinout on the NCU variants.

Table 6-5: RJ-45 Panel Jack Pinout (NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS)
RJ-45 Panel Jack Pin Number Signal Signal Direction
1 TXD+ output
2 TXD- output
Pin 8
3 RXD+ input
4 no connection
5 no connection
Pin 1
6 RXD- input
7 no connection
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

8 no connection

Use a standard shielded Category 5 cable.

6-16 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS

Operating System The NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS run Linux-Kernel 2.4.25 and a Linux Dis-
tribution which is optimized for embedded applications. Linux starts au-
tomatically when the FSP 3000R7 is powered up. The system is typically
ready for management operation in about 70 seconds after power-on.
Linux needs to be configured for the specific environment. See the User
Guide of the FSP 3000R7 documentation set for configuration informa-
tion.

Application The NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS supports the following management
Software tools:
• Craft Console
• Web Browser Console
• Element Manager
• TL1
• SNMP agent

Reset Button To reset the NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS, use the reset button located
on their faceplates. If required, press and release this button using a
pointed tool. The green power LED comes on and the module starts up.
The optical transmission system is not affected by a restart.

Default NCU The NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS come with the following factory-default
Settings configuration:

Table 6-6: NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS Factory-Default Settings


Option Settings
DSUB9/Mini-AB USB Port 19200 bit/s
8 bits
No parity
1 stop bit
No flow control
(Logging into the NE requires an activated carrier
detect signal.)
LAN IP Addresses 192.168.1.1 (port C1)
192.168.1.1 (port C2)
Subnet 255.255.255.0 (port C1)
255.255.255.0 (port C2)
Default Gateway 192.168.2.12
Hostname nemi
User Accounts ADMIN, PROVISION, OPERATOR, MONITOR
Account Passwords All account passwords are factory set to CHGME.1

Placement The NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS are placed in slot A of the 1HU Shelf or
the 7HU Shelf and makes it the master shelf that should have shelf ID 1.

LED indicators The NCU-A, NCU-B and NCU-GDPS have two LED indicators on the face-
plate and two LAN port LEDs per Ethernet Interface. The LED colors rep-
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

resent different operating states. For details, refer to the Troubleshooting


Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.3.1 ‚ p. 3-14.

Document Version 7.1.5 6-17


Hardware Description

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 6-2 and Figure 6-3.

Module Type Label


Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
NCU-A
Port Description Serial Number:
Ser Serial
USB USB-Serial xxxxxxxxxxxx
C NET 10/100 routed

Electronic Module

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 6-2: Example of an NCU-A Module Type Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 6-3: Example of an NCU-A Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.

HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

6-18 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


NCU (NCU2E Type)

6.2 NCU (NCU2E Type)

Module name Variants:


none

Module status LED Serial number


indicators
Reset button
USB ports

Ethernet ports with two


LAN port LEDs

Item number

Fig. 6-4: NCU Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 6-1 lists all abbreviations on the NCU faceplate and their meanings.
Table 6-7: NCU Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Electrical Ports
P power supply status of the module USB2 USB port 2
Mod operating states of the module USB1 USB port 1
C2 Ethernet port 2
C1 Ethernet port 1

Description The Network Element Control Unit (NCU) provides system management ca-
pabilities and network connection to the FSP 3000R7 system.
The NCU is a single-slot 2.5 HU high plug-in module, that acts as a hard-
ware interface between the different modules of the system and the
equipment connected to its management interfaces. One NCU is able to
manage a whole NE. Using Internet protocols, this hardware interface
provides management and configuration capabilities, for example provi-
sioning, alarming and so on. The NCU directly controls and monitors the
modules in its own shelf (master shelf) and indirectly those in the main
shelves through the Shelf Control Units (SCUs). A NCU communicates with
the SCU in the master shelf using an internal system bus. Exchange of in-
formation between the SCU in the master shelf and the SCUs in the main
shelves takes place over their fiber ring. The NCU can be accessed through
a USB or Ethernet port via terminal program or Ethernet using telnet, FTP,
htpp, SCP, SNMP, NTP etc. The NCUs’ command line interface allows fast
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

(local) interaction. External Network Management Systems (NMSs) are


supported using SNMP over the Ethernet interface.

Document Version 7.1.5 6-19


Hardware Description

External DCN connections can be provided through embedded communi-


cation channels (ECC).
The NCU must be configured for the specific operating environment. De-
pending on the capabilities of the NE, specific Right to Use (RTU) ver-
sions may be required.

Functions and The main functions and features are:


Features • Registration and deregistration of all inserted modules
• Monitoring of the presence of all inserted modules, the power
supply units and the fan unit
• Detection of component failures
• Error and warning messages
• Bidirectional transmission of management and configuration control
information to/from the NCU to the SCUs to which it is physically
connected using fiber-optic patch cable pairs
• Control of a complete FSP 3000R7 network element consisting of up
to 20 shelves (1 master shelf and 19 main shelves)
• Open platform to connect to any IP based system
• Remote management and configuration of all interconnected shelves
• Furnish SNMP monitoring and trap generation
• Support of the following RTU versions:
• RTU CWDM Access
• RTU DWDM Core and Access
• RTU FC/FICON
• RTU DWDM GDPS
• Support of up to 10 ECCs
• Reset button to reset the module
• Exchangeable compact flash (CF) card in case of a hardware failure
(For this purpose, the NCU must be removed from the shelf slot.)
• Status LED Indicators on the faceplate
• Support of all NE types, such as OTM and OADM

Interfaces The NCU provides two USB ports and two Ethernet ports on its faceplate
for management purposes.

Ethernet Ports The Ethernet ports labeled C1 and C2 are female RJ-45 receptacles used
to connect the NCU to the NMS or the management PC via a standard
Ethernet crossover cable. However, in a system equipped with an Optical
Supervisory Channel (OSC), the connection is made at the OSCM instead.
In this case the NCU is connected to the Ethernet switch of the OSCM us-
ing a standard Ethernet straight-through cable as well. After this config-
uration, one IP address (that on the NCU) is used for the complete NE.
The ports comply with the IEEE 802.3 10/100BASE-TX and IEEE 802.3u
standards. Each Ethernet port supports
• Data rates of 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s (Fast Ethernet)
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

• Adjustment of the data rates using the auto-negotiation function


• Enabling/disabling the port

6-20 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


NCU (NCU2E Type)

• Data Communications Equipment (DCE) according to IEEE 802.3


(automatic MDI/MDI-X crossover capabilities)
• Half/full duplex mode
See Table 6-8 for the Ethernet port pinouts on the NCU.

Table 6-8: RJ-45 Panel Jack Pinout (NCU)


RJ-45 Panel Jack Pin Number Signal Signal Direction
1 TXD+ output
2 TXD- output
Pin 8
3 RXD+ input
4 no connection
5 no connection
Pin 1
6 RXD- input
7 no connection
8 no connection

Use a standard shielded Category 5 cable.

USB Ports The USB ports labeled USB1 and USB2 are Mini-AB receptacles that com-
ply with USB 2.0 specifications. The USB1 port provides only USB to
RS232 emulation. It is used for a direct serial connection to a manage-
ment PC. The USB2 port is not yet supported by the software, and can
therefore not be used. If necessary, the ports can be disabled.

A USB connection requires a respective driver in the management PC. This


driver is available on the User Documentation Set CD or can be obtained
Note from ADVA.

Both ports can accept either a Mini-A USB plug or a Mini-B USB plug, but
use only a detachable USB cable with a Mini-A USB plug on one end and
a standard A-plug on the other end. For pinout of the Mini-AB recepta-
cles, see Table 6-9.

Table 6-9: Mini-AB USB Receptacle Pinout (NCU)


Mini-AB USB Receptacle Pin Function Description
1 V BUS USB power
2 D- Negative Data
signal
3 D+ Positive Data signal
4 ID Identification
5 GND Signal ground

Most of the pins of a Mini-USB receptacle are the same as a standard USB
connector, except pin 4. Pin 4 is called ID, and is not present in standard
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

USB plugs. The ID pin identifies which type of plug is connected. This pin
is shorted to ground in the Mini-A plug and unconnected in the Mini-B
plug.

Document Version 7.1.5 6-21


Hardware Description

Operating System The NCU run Linux-Kernel 2.4.25 and a Linux Distribution which is opti-
mized for embedded applications. Linux starts automatically when the
FSP 3000R7 is powered up. The system is typically ready for management
operation in about 70 seconds after power-on. Linux needs to be config-
ured for the specific environment. See the User Guide of the FSP 3000R7
documentation set for configuration information.

Application The NCU supports the following management tools:


Software • Craft Console
• Web Browser Console
• Element Manager
• TL1
• SNMP agent

Reset Button To reset the NCU, use the reset button located on its faceplate. If re-
quired, press and release this button using a pointed tool. The green pow-
er LED comes on and the module starts up. The optical transmission
system is not affected by a restart.

Default NCU The NCU comes with the following factory-default configuration:
Settings
Table 6-10: NCU Factory-Default Settings
Option Settings
Mini-AB USB Port 19200 bit/s
8 bits
No parity
1 stop bit
No flow control
(Logging into the NE requires an activated carrier
detect signal.)
LAN IP Addresses 192.168.1.1 (port C1
192.168.1.1 (port C2)
Subnet 255.255.255.0 (port C1
255.255.255.0 (port C2)
Default Gateway 192.168.2.12
Hostname nemi
User Accounts ADMIN, PROVISION, OPERATOR, MONITOR
Account Passwords All account passwords are factory set to CHGME.1

Placement The NCU is placed in slot A of the 1HU Shelf or the 7HU Shelf and makes
it the master shelf that should have shelf ID 1.

LED indicators The NCU has two LED indicators on the faceplate and two LAN port LEDs
per Ethernet Interface. The LED colors represent different operating
states. For details, refer to the Troubleshooting Guide, Chapter 3, Section
3.3.1 ‚ p. 3-14.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

mation as shown in Figure 6-5 and Figure 6-6.

6-22 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


NCU (NCU2E Type)

Module Type Label


Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
NCU
USB2 USB-Serial
Serial Number:
USB1 USB-OTG
C2 NET 10/100 routed xxxxxxxxxxxx
C1 NET 10/100 routed

Electronic Module

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 6-5: Example of an NCU Module Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 6-6: Example of an NCU Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 6-23


Hardware Description

6.3 SCU
Variants:
none
Module name Serial number
S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx

Module status LED indicators


Uplink interface U: Uplink port LED indicators:
Transmitter connector (U-T) U-T
Receiver connector (U-R) U-R
Downlink interface D: Downlink port LED indicators:
Transmitter connector (D-T) D-T
Receiver connector (D-R) D-R
Extension shelf interface X: Extension shelf port LED indicators
Transmitter connector (X-T) X-T
Receiver connector (X-R) P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx
X-R

Item number

Fig. 6-7: SCU Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 6-11 lists all abbreviations on the SCU faceplate and their mean-
ings.
Table 6-11: SCU Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
P power supply status of the module T transmit
Mod operating status of the module R receive
U-T* operating status of the transmitter of U uplink interface
the uplink interface
U-R* operating status of the receiver of D downlink interface
the uplink interface
D-T* operating status of the transmitter of X extension shelf interface
the downlink interface
D-R* operating status of the receiver of
the downlink interface
X-T* operating status of the transmitter of
the extension shelf interface
X-R* operating status of the receiver of
the extension shelf interface
* Designations of the port LED indicators are not explicitly marked on the faceplate.

Description The SCU (Shelf Control Unit) is a single-slot 2.5 HU high plug-in module,
which acts as the controller for an entire main shelf. It recognizes all in-
serted optical modules and downloads their configuration data stored in
the NCU. The SCU communicates with each module of its shelf using the
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

internal system bus on the backplane. The SCU queries each module for
relevant information, such as module type, serial number, device code,
operating status, link status, etc. If the response is not correct, the SCU

6-24 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


SCU

interrogates in greater detail for the exact fault. This allows the SCU to
determine whether any of the conditions have changed since the last
time it was queried. The SCU fully supports digital diagnostics for optical
performance monitoring of pluggable transceivers as well.
The module also monitors the power supply units and the cooling fans.
In routine operation, SNMP traps are set and passed on to the NCU to pro-
vide instant alerts to potential problems.
The SCU contains cross-connect circuitry for the internal and external
management connections of the network element (NE).
In a ring, the SCU also provides redundant inter-shelf communication.
The SCU in the master shelf (the shelf with the NCU) connects the main
shelves of the NE to the NCU. Additionally, each SCU supports non-redun-
dant connectivity to one extension shelf equipped with an SCU-E.
The master shelf and not more than 19 main shelves as well as up to 20
extension shelves can be interconnected to build one NE (maximum sys-
tem configuration).

Functions and The main functions and features are:


Features • Registration and deregistration of all inserted modules
• Monitoring of the presence of all inserted modules, the power
supply units and the fan unit
• Detection of component failures
• Error and warning messages
• Enabling of ring closing
• Bidirectional transmission of management and configuration control
information to/from the SCU or SCU-E to which it is physically
connected using a fiber-optic patch cable pair
• Redundant connectivity to two main shelves equipped with one SCU
each
• Non-redundant connectivity to one extension shelf populated with
an SCU-E
• No configuration requirements
• Three Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) MSA compliant interfaces
for optical fiber termination

Optical Interfaces SFP transceivers and the optical fibers are not included in delivery. They
must be specifically ordered from the ADVA Optical Networking AG.
The SFP transceiver cages will be equipped with dust plugs on delivery to
prevent impurities. These dust plugs should be in the cages as long as the
SCU is not installed in a running system.
The uplink interface (U) is used for connection to the SCU of the upper
main shelf, and the downlink interface (D) is used for connection to the
SCU of the lower main shelf. The extension shelf interface (E) is connect-
ed to the SCU-E of an extension shelf. When one or two interfaces are not
used, the corresponding SFP cages need not be populated with an SFP
transceiver. Make sure to insert dust plugs into the empty cages.
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 6-25


Hardware Description

SFP transceivers SFP cages should only be populated with ADVA-approved SFP transceivers
intended for the SCU only. If you use non-ADVA approved SFPs in con-
junction with the SCU or SCU-E, ADVA Optical Networking AG cannot guar-
antee the behavior of the shelf control units.

Placement The SCU is placed in slot B of the 1HU Shelf or the 7HU Shelf.

LED Indicators The SCU has tri-color LED indicators on the faceplate. The LED colors rep-
resent different operating states. For details, refer to the Troubleshooting
Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.3.2 ‚ p. 3-18.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 6-8 and Figure 6-9.

Module Type Label


Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
SCU
Supported SFPs:
U Up U SFP / HS / 850I / MM / LC Serial Number:

D Down D SFP / HS / 850I / MM / LC


X Extension X SFP / HS / 850I / MM / LC xxxxxxxxxxxx

Electronic Module

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 6-8: Example of an SCU Module Type Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 6-9: Example of an SCU Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

6-26 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


VSM

6.4 VSM

Module name Variants:


VSM
Serial number none
S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx

LED indicators

Lock button

Input port (C2-R)


Output port (C2-T)
Input port (C1-R)
Output port (C1-T)

Input port (NW-R)


Output port (NW-T)

Input port (NE-R)


Output port (NE-T)

Item number
P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx

Fig. 6-10: VSM Overview

Faceplate Markings Table 6-12 lists all abbreviations on the VSM faceplate and their mean-
ings.

Table 6-12: VSM Faceplate Markings

LED Indicators Optical Ports


P power supply status of the module R Input port
Mod operating states of the module T Output port
NW operating states of the network port west NW Network port west
NE operating states of the network port east NE Network port east
C2 Client port 2
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

C1 Client port 1

Document Version 7.1.5 6-27


Hardware Description

Description The Versatile Switch Module (VSM) is an optical switch for protection pur-
poses. Protection switching can be triggered by commands from the
2OSCM.
These commands are transmitted via the backplane of the FSP system. The
backup path can only be monitored in configurations with 2OSCM. The
VSM can work on a fiber, band, subband, group or channel basis.

Signal Path The VSM contains two cross switches that are switched in phase.

Network Client
port N VSM ports C
NW-R Low priority C2-R

NW-T High priority C2-T

NE-R C1-R

NE-T C1-T

Receive direction
Transmit direction
Fig. 6-11: Operation Scheme of a VSM

Placement The VSM can be placed in any 5 HU FSP slot.

LED Indicators The VSM has tri-color LED indicators on the faceplate. The LED colors rep-
resent different operating states. For details, refer to the Troubleshooting
Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.4.1 ‚ p. 3-22.

Push Button There is a push button on the faceplate of the VSM which is labeled
“Lock”. Table 6-13 describes function and effect of these button.
Table 6-13: VSM Push Button Description
Button Function Description
Lock Toggle LOCK Current State: Switches are manually locked to Line
between: west or East, regarding the current state.
west line
or east LOCK Other state: Switches will be manually locked to the
line other line (west or east) if the cycle is completed within 10
seconds.

AUTO: Switches are switched automatically to the


appropriate line with regard to the measured fiber
condition.
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

After a time-out of 10 seconds, the next push of the button


will lock the switch to the current line!

6-28 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


VSM

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 6-12, Figure 6-13 and Figure 6-14.

Module Type Label


Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
VSM

Port Description Serial Number:

NW Network Line West

NE Network Line East xxxxxxxxxxxx

C2 Low Priority
C1 High Priority
Laser Module

Fig. 6-12: Example of a VSM Module Type Label

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 6-13: Example of a VSM Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 6-14: Example of a VSM Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 6-29


Hardware Description

6.5 RSM-OLM#1630

Module name Variants:


RSM-OLM none
#1630 Serial number
S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx

Auto/Lock button
LED indicators

Output monitor (C1mo)


Output monitor (C2mo)

Output port (NW-T)


Input port (NW-R)

Output port (NE-T)


Input port (NE-R)

Input port (C2-R)


Output port (C2-T)

Input port (C1-R)


Output port (C1-T)

Item number
P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx

Fig. 6-15: RSM-OLM#1630 Module Overview

The RSM-OLM#1630 is a converted FSP 2000 Release 6.2 module as


indicated by the asterisk printed on its face plate. The module provides
full FSP 2000 Release 6.2 functionality. Monitoring and troubleshooting
follow FSP 2000 Release 6.2 rules. This mainly concerns ALS and LED
behavior.
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

Faceplate Markings Table 6-14 list all abbreviations on the RSM-OLM#1630 faceplate and their
meanings.

6-30 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


RSM-OLM#1630

Table 6-14: RSM-OLM#1630 Faceplate Markings

LED Indicators Optical Ports


On power supply status of the module C1mo Output monitor C1
Lk operating states of the module C2mo Output monitor C2
NW operating states of the Network port West R Input port
NE operating states of the Network port East T Output port
NW Network port West
NE Network port East
C2 Client port 2
C1 Client port 1

Description The Remote Switch Module with optical line monitoring (RSM-OLM#1630)
monitors the transmission line for line protection switching in the event
of fiber break or fiber degradation. As long as both network fiber pairs are
available, the non-active fiber pair can be used to transmit low priority
traffic.

Signal Path The RSM-OLM is connected to two network fiber pairs of an opposite RSM-
OLM. The NW port and NE port are connected together with the same ports
of the opposite RSM-OLM. A 1630 nm pilot laser is added to one network
fiber pair. The pilot laser of the opposite RSM-OLM is dropped from the
other network fiber pair and evaluated for protection switching.
If a fiber carrying high-priority traffic is impaired, the control logic
switches to the protection fiber pair. This also switches the pilot laser and
forces the RSM-OLM on the other side to follow. The low-priority traffic is
interrupted in this process.
A 5% monitoring port allows to check the received signals without
interrupting service.
Network Client
port N ports C
Switch Rx
RSM-OLM coupler
NW-R C2-R

coupler
NW-T C2-T
Optical
control
block
NE-R Switch Tx C1-R

NE-T C1-T

C1 mo
Data-traffic
R = Receive Control Unit C2 mo
T = Transmit

Fig. 6-16: Operating Scheme of an RSM-OLM

Placement The RSM-OLM may be placed in any 5 HU FSP slot. The RSM-OLM cannot
be used together with the OSC as both use the same wavelength for
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

different purposes.

Document Version 7.1.5 6-31


Hardware Description

LED Indicators The RSM-OLM has tri-color LED indicators on the faceplate. The LED colors
represent different operating states. For details, refer to the Troubleshoot-
ing Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.4.2 ‚ p. 3-24.

Push Button There is a push button on the faceplate of the RSM-OLM which is labeled
“Lock/Auto”. Table 6-15 describes function and effect of these button.

Table 6-15: Push Button Description


Button Function Description
Lock/ Toggle between: west line or LOCK Current State: Switches are manually
Auto east line locked to Line west or East, regarding the
current state.

LOCK Other state: Switches will be


manually locked to the other line (west or
east) if the cycle is completed within 10
seconds.

AUTO: Switches are switched


automatically to the appropriate line with
regard to the measured fiber condition.

After a time-out of 10 seconds, the next


push of the button will lock the switch to
the current line!

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 6-17, Figure 6-18 and Figure 6-19.

Module Type Label


Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
RSM-OLM#1630
Port Description
Serial Number:
C2mo Monitoring
C1mo Monitoring
xxxxxxxxxxxx
NW Network Line West
NE Network Line East
C2 Low Priority
C1 High Priority

Output Power Range: -4 to 0 dBm


Receiver Dynamic Range: -32 to 0 dBm
Laser Wavelength: 1630 nm
Meas. range gor WDM budget:
0 to 26 dB between 2 RSMs Laser Module

Fig. 6-17: Example of an RSM-OLM#1630 Module Type Label


HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

6-32 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


RSM-OLM#1630

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 6-18: Example of an RSM-OLM#1630 Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 6-19: Example of an RSM-OLM#1630 Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 6-33


Hardware Description

6.6 RSM-SF#1510
Variants:
Module name
Serial number none

LED Indicators

Auto/Lock push buttons

Network port West (NW)


Network port East (NE)

Input port (C-R)


Output port (C-T)

Item number

Fig. 6-20: RSM-SF Module Overview

Faceplate Markings Table 6-16 list all abbreviations on the RSM-SF#1510 faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 6-16: RSM-SF#1510 Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
On power supply status NW network output port West
Lk operating states of the module NE network output port East
NW operating states of the network port West C1 client port
NE operating states of the network port East
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

6-34 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


RSM-SF#1510

The RSM-SF is a converted FSP 2000 Release 6.2 module as indicated by


the asterisk printed on its face plate. The module provides full FSP 2000
Release 6.2 functionality. Monitoring and troubleshooting follow FSP
2000 Release 6.2 rules. This mainly concerns ALS and LED behavior.

Description The Single-Fiber Remote Switch Module working at 1510 nm (RSM-


SF#1510) enables line protection in case of fiber break. The RSM-SF#1510
is the partner module of the RSM-SF#1310 the pilot laser of which oper-
ates at a wavelength of 1310 nm.

Signal Path A pilot laser is added at one side of the link and dropped at the other.
The received signal level is evaluated for protection switching. Both mod-
ules transmit on one of the wavelengths and receives on the other, i.e.
an RSM-SF#1510 must work in tandem with an RSM-SF#1310 at the oppo-
site network element. See “RSM-SF#1310 working in tandem with RSM-
SF#1510” on p. 6-40

Placement The RSM-SF#1510 can be placed in any 5 HU FSP slot.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 6-21, Figure 6-22 and Figure 6-23.

Module Type Label


Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
RSM-SF#1510
Port Description Serial Number:
NW Network Line West
NE Network Line East xxxxxxxxxxxx
C Client

Output Power Range: -4.5 to 0 dBm


Receiver Dynamic Range: -32 to 0 dBm
Laser Wavelength: 1510 nm
Meas. range gor WDM budget:
0 to 26 dB between 2 RSMs
Laser Module

Fig. 6-21: Example of an RSM-SF#1510 Module Type Label


HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 6-35


Hardware Description

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 6-22: Example of an RSM-SF#1510 Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 6-23: Example of an RSM-SF#1510 Warranty Label

LED Indicators The RSM-SF#1510 has tri-color LED indicators on the faceplate. The LED
colors represent different operating states. For details, refer to the Trou-
bleshooting Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.4.2 ‚ p. 3-24.

Push Buttons There are three push buttons on the faceplate of the RSM-SF#1510.
Table 6-17 describes function and effect of these push buttons.
Table 6-17: Push Button Description
Label Function Effect
Lk-W Locks to west network line Line west is active and switch is locked
to line west.
Lk-E Locks to east network line Line east is active and switch is locked to
line east.
Auto Enables automatic The module runs in automatic mode.
protection switching

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

6-36 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


RSM-SF#1310

6.7 RSM-SF#1310
Variants:
Module name
Serial number none

LED Indicators

Auto/Lock push buttons

Network port West (NW)


Network port East (NE)

Input port (C1-R)


Output port (C1-T)

Item number

Fig. 6-24: RSM-SF Module Overview

Faceplate Markings Table 6-18 list all abbreviations on the RSM-SF#1310 faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 6-18: RSM-SF#1310 Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
On power supply status NW network output port West
Lk operating states of the module NE network output port East
NW operating states of the network port West C1 client port
NE operating states of the network port East
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 6-37


Hardware Description

The RSM-SF is a converted FSP 2000 Release 6.2 module as indicated by


the asterisk printed on its face plate. The module provides full FSP 2000
Release 6.2 functionality. Monitoring and troubleshooting follow FSP
2000 Release 6.2 rules. This mainly concerns ALS and LED behavior.

Description The Single-Fiber Remote Switch Module working at 1310 nm (RSM-


SF#1310) enables line protection in case of fiber break. All optical con-
nectors are of the LC type.

Signal Path A pilot laser is added at one side of the link and dropped at the other.
The received signal level is evaluated for protection switching. Both mod-
ules transmit on one of the wavelengths and receives on the other, i.e.
an RSM-SF#1310 must work in tandem with an RSM-SF#1510 at the oppo-
site network element. See “RSM-SF#1310 working in tandem with RSM-
SF#1510” on p. 6-40.

Placement The RSM-SF#1310 can be placed in any 5 HU FSP slot.

LED Indicators The RSM-SF#1310 has tri-color LED indicators on the faceplate. The LED
colors represent different operating states. For details, refer to the Trou-
bleshooting Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.4.2 ‚ p. 3-24.

Push Buttons There are three push buttons on the faceplate of the RSM-SF#1310.
Table 6-19 describes function and effect of these push buttons.

Table 6-19: RSM-SF#1310 Push Button Description


Label Function Effect
Lk-W Locks to west network line Line west is active and switch is locked
to line west.
Lk-E Locks to east network line Line east is active and switch is locked to
line east.
Auto Enables automatic The module runs in automatic mode.
protection switching

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 6-25, Figure 6-26 and Figure 6-27.
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

6-38 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


RSM-SF#1310

Module Type Label


Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
RSM-SF#1310
Port Description Serial Number:
NW Network Line West
NE Network Line East xxxxxxxxxxxx
C Client

Output Power Range: -4.5 to 0 dBm


Receiver Dynamic Range: -32 to 0 dBm
Laser Wavelength: 1310 nm
Meas. range gor WDM budget:
0 to 26 dB between 2 RSMs
Laser Module

Fig. 6-25: Example of an RSM-SF#1310 Module Type Label

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 6-26: Example of an RSM-SF#1310 Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 6-27: Example of an RSM-SF#1310 Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 6-39


6-40
Hardware Description

Client Network Client


port C RSM-SF#1310 ports N RSM-SF#1510 port C
coupler coupler
OSF NW NW OSF
C1 C1
OSF NE NE OSF

coupler coupler
1310 1510 1510 1310 1310 1510
decision logic decision logic

T R R R R T

Pilot laser signal 1310 Data-traffic


Pilot laser signal 1510

Fig. 6-28: RSM-SF#1310 working in tandem with RSM-SF#1510

FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm
OSCM-V#1630

6.8 OSCM-V#1630
Variants:
Module name
OSCM none
V#1630
Serial number
S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx

LED indicators

Reset button

Input port (N-R)


Output port to OSFM (N-T)

Ethernet interface 3
(Net 10/100 switched) with two LAN port LEDs

Ethernet interface 2
(Net 10/100 switched) with two LAN port LEDs

Ethernet interface 1
(Net 10/100 switched) with two LAN port LEDs

Item number
P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx

Fig. 6-29: OSCM-V#1630 Module Overview

Faceplate Markings Table 6-20 list all abbreviations on the OSCM-V#1630 faceplate and their
meanings.
Table 6-20: OSCM Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
P power supply status of the module R Input port
Mod operating states of the module T Output port
N operating states of the network port N Network port
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

C3 operating status of the Ethernet port 3 C3 Ethernet port 3


C2 operating status of the Ethernet port 2 C2 Ethernet port 2
C1 operating status of the Ethernet port 1 C1 Ethernet port 1

Document Version 7.1.5 6-41


Hardware Description

Description The OSCM-V#1630 is a Optical Supervisory Channel Module with optical


line monitoring and one optical port . This module adds/drops a 1630 nm
OSC signal and converts it to/from electrical 10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet sig-
nals.
The OSCM-V#1630 contains one optical port for this application.

Signal Path The OSCM has


• an optical transmitter and receiver for 1630 nm
• an integrated Ethernet switch with routing processor and
• three electrical 10/100BASE-T ports.

Network
port N
OSCM
o o
Tx Rx
e e

Control Unit
OSC OSC

Ethernet Switch 10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet Router

LAN1 LAN2 LAN3 16*ECC


Client
port C

Data traffic IP routing


T = Transmit
R = Receive

Fig. 6-30: Operating Scheme of an OSCM-V#1630

The module monitors the optical line for fiber breaks and fluctuations of
fiber attenuation. This information can be used for protection switching.

Placement The OSCM can be placed in any 5 HU FSP slot.

LED Indicators The OSCM-V#1630 has tri-color LED indicators on the faceplate. The LED
colors represent different operating states. For details, refer to the Trou-
bleshooting Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.3.3 ‚ p. 3-20.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 6-31, Figure 6-32 and Figure 6-33.
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

6-42 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


OSCM-V#1630

Module Type Label


Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
OSCM-V#1630
Port Description Serial Number:
N OSC
C3 Net 10/100 switched xxxxxxxxxxxx
C2 Net 10/100 switched
C1 Net 10/100 switched

Output Power Range: -0.5 to 3 dBm


Receiver Dynamic Range: -33.5 to -5.0 dBm
Wavelength: 1630 nm
Laser Module

Fig. 6-31: Example of an OSCM-V#1630 Module Type Label

Certification Label

nn ova

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 6-32: Example of an OSCM-V#1630 Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 6-33: Example of an OSCM-V#1630 Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 6-43


Hardware Description

6.9 2OSCM-V#1630
Variants:
Module name
2OSCM none
V#1630
Serial number
S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx

LED indicators

Reset button

Input port (NW-R)


Output port to east OSFM (NW-T)

Input port (NE-R)


Output port to west OSFM (NE-T)

Ethernet port 3 (Net 10/100 switched)


with two LAN port LEDs

Ethernet port 2 (Net 10/100 switched)


with two LAN port LEDs

Ethernet port 1 (Net 10/100 switched)


with two LAN port LEDs

Item number
P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx

Fig. 6-34: 2OSCM-V#1630 Module Overview

Faceplate Markings Table 6-21 lists all abbreviations on the 2OSCM-V#1630 faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 6-21: OSCM Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
P power supply status R Input port
Mod operating states of the module T Output port
C3 operating status of the Ethernet port 3 NW Network ports west
C2 operating status of the Ethernet port 2 NE Network ports east
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

C1 operating status of the Ethernet port 1

6-44 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


2OSCM-V#1630

Description The 2OSCM-V#1630 is a Optical Supervisory Channel Module with optical


line monitoring and two optical ports. This module adds/drops a 1630 nm
OSC signal and converts it to/from electrical 10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet sig-
nals.
The 2OSCM-V#1630 contains two optical ports for east-west applications.

Signal Path The 2OSCM has


• two optical transmitters and receivers for 1630 nm
• an integrated Ethernet switch with routing processor and
• three electrical 10/100BASE-T ports (Ethernet interfaces).

Network
ports NW-R NW-T NE-T NE-R

2OSCM
o o o o
Rx Tx Tx Rx
e e e e

Control Unit
OSC OSC

Ethernet Switch 10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet Router

LAN1 LAN2 LAN3 16*ECC


Client
ports C

Data traffic IP routing


T = Transmit
R = Receive

Fig. 6-35: Operating Scheme of a 2OSCM-V#1630

The module monitors the optical line for fiber breaks and fluctuations of
fiber attenuation. This information can be used for protection switching.

Placement The 2OSCM can be placed in any 5 HU FSP slot.

LED Indicators The 2OSCM-V#1630 has tri-color LED indicators on the faceplate. The LED
colors represent different operating states. For details, refer to the Trou-
bleshooting Guide, Chapter 3, Section 3.3.3 ‚ p. 3-20.

Labeling Several labels printed on the board cover provides module specific infor-
mation as shown in Figure 6-36, Figure 6-37 and Figure 6-38.
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 6-45


Hardware Description

Module Type Label


Item Number:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
2OSCM-V#1630
Port Description Serial Number:
NW OSC West
NE OSC East xxxxxxxxxxxx
C3 Net 10/100 switched
C2 Net 10/100 switched
C1 Net 10/100 switched

Output Power Range: -0.5 to 3 dBm


Receiver Dynamic Range: -33.5 to -5.0 dBm
Wavelength: 1630 nm
Laser Module

Fig. 6-36: Example of an 2OSCM-V#1630 Module Type Label

Certification Label

nn ova

This page intentionally left blank

ITE
Equipment
E174175

Fig. 6-37: Example of an 2OSCM-V#1630 Certification Label

Warranty Label
WARRANTY VOID
IF SEAL IS BROKEN
Fig. 6-38: Example of an 2OSCM-V#1630 Warranty Label

Specifications For technical details, please refer to FSP 3000R7 Module and System Spec-
ification.
HWD_6_Man_SwMod.fm

6-46 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


Chapter 7
Optical Filter Modules
This chapter provides general descriptions of all passive optical modules
that the FSP 3000R7 currently supports.
Each description provides information on the key features the module of-
fers, its main components and how it operates. Also provided is an illus-
tration of the module’s front view with port description, the operating
scheme and the module label.
Before each module type is described in subsections, the conventions of
the several optical filter types and the naming of the optical filter module
types are discussed.
This chapter includes the following module descriptions:
7.1 2CLSM-#D01-#D64
7.2 2BSM-#Dxx-#Dyy
7.3 4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy
7.4 8GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy
7.5 1GSM+#Dxx-#Dyy
7.6 4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy
7.7 4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy
7.8 40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy
7.9 1CSM+#Dxx-E/W
7.10 2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610
7.11 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610
7.12 4CSM-#Cxxxx-#Cyyyy
7.13 8CSM+#C1470-#C1610
7.14 1CSM+#G1310
7.15 1CSM+#Cxxxx
7.16 1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W
7.17 OSFM+#1630
7.18 PSM-95/5
7.19 1PM/SM
7.21 2PM/SM
7.20 1PM/MM
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

7.22 2PM/MM

FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description Document Version 7.1.5 7-1


Hardware Description

Overview • C-Band/L-Band Splitter (2CLSM-#D01-#D64)


• Band Splitter Modules (BSMs)
• 2-port Red/Blue Splitter for C- or L-band (2BSM-#Dxx-#Dyy)
• CWDM Band Splitter Module for 8 channels
(2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610)
• CWDM Band Splitter Module for 8 channels and 1310-nm
connectivity (3BSM-#G1310-#C1610)
• Group Splitter Modules (GSMs)
• 8-port Group Splitter for C- or L-band (8GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy)
Two discrete module variants are available.
• 4-port Group Splitter for C- or L-band (4GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy)
4 discrete module variants are available.
• 1-Group Splitter Modules for C- or L-band (1GSM-#Dxx-#Dyy)
16 discrete module variants are available.
• Channel Splitter Modules (CSMs)
• 40-port MUX/DMX Channel Splitter for C- or L-band
(40CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy)
Two discrete module variants are available.
• CWDM 4-Channel Splitter Module for #C1470, #1490, #1590,
#C1610 (4CSM-#C1470-#C1610)
• CWDM 4-Channel Splitter Module for #C1510, #1530, #1550,
#C1570 (4CSM-#C1510-#C1570)
• CWDM Single Channel Splitter Module (1CSM+#Cxxxx)
8 variants are available.
• CWDM Single Channel Splitter Module with 1310-nm
connectivity (1CSM+#G1310)
• East/West CWDM Single Channel Splitter Module
(1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W)
The module is available in 8 variants, one for each of the
8 CWDM wavelengths it supports.
• East/West DWDM Single Channel Splitter Module
(1CSM+#Dxx-E/W)
The module is available in 64 variants, one for each of the
64 DWDM wavelengths it supports.
• Optical Supervisory Filter Module (OSFM+#1630)
• Optical Power Splitter Modules
• Power Splitter Module 95/5 (PSM 95/5)
• Protection Modules
- Single-port Protection Module Single Mode (1PM/SM)
- 2-port Protection Module Single Mode (2PM/SM)
- Single-port Protection Module Multimode (1PM/MM)
- 2-port Protection Module Multimode(2PM/MM)
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

7-2 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


Optical Filter Optical filter modules receive and transmit optical signals according to
Variants their wavelengths in CWDM or DWDM systems.
The modules contain optical filters which drop/add, demultiplex/multi-
plex or split/couple the signals. Often several filters are cascaded.

Demultiplexer and The Demultiplexer (DEMUX) is an optical filter that splits a composite
Multiplexer DWDM/CWDM signal into DWDM/CWDM several channels, channel groups
or channel bands (depends on the module type).
The Multiplexer (MUX) is an optical filter that combines the received
DWDM/CWDM channels, channel groups or channel bands (depends on the
module type) into one composite DWDM/CWDM signal at the same time.
Demultiplexer and Multiplexer are often used full duplex in one module.

Drop and Add Filter An Drop/Add optical filter is used in an optical filter module, if the mod-
ule contains one upgrade port and one channel, channel group or channel
band (depends on the module type).
An optical filter drops a DWDM/CWDM channel, channel group or channel
band out of a channel spectrum while the remaining channels are reflect-
ed onto the upgrade port.
The optical filter adds the received DWDM/CWDM channel, channel group
or channel band in the direction of data flow to the channel signal com-
ing from the upgrade port. The signal are then combined and transmitted
through an optical fiber.
Optical filters for add and drop are often used full duplex in one module.

Splitter/Coupler A Splitter is an optical filter that splits one signal into two optical paths
with identical data.
A Coupler is an optical filter that couples two received signal paths with
identical data to one output signal.
Module Design Optical filter modules are designed as a plug-in modules that are compat-
ible with any 7HU Shelf (SH7HU) or 1HU Shelf (SH1HU). The modules fully
conform to the requirements of all relevant SDH ITU-T and SONET AN-
SI/Telcordia standards.
All optical filter modules have special EMC contact strips attached to
them, which creates a tight seal with neighboring modules. The EMC con-
tact strips avoid unintended propagation of electromagnetic energy to-
wards the external environment that might disrupt other equipment.

Faceplate Markings All FSP 3000R7 optical filter modules have the same faceplate markings.
LED indicator and optical port markings of the individual modules are ex-
plained in the appropriate module descriptions.

LED Indicators All optical filter modules have one tri-color LED indicator that are visible
through the faceplates. The colors of the LED indicator display different
operating states. The status that each color of the LED indicator repre-
sents is described in the Troubleshooting Guide.
HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

Document Version 7.1.5 7-3


Hardware Description

Labeling Optical filter modules have several printed labels (module type label, cer-
tification label and warranty label) on the board cover, which contain
specific module information. The labels of the individual modules are
shown in the appropriate module descriptions.

Module Type Label This label contains module information, such as


• the name of the module
• the module type
• the serial number and its bar code
• the item number and its bar code
• port descriptions and the appropriate channel numbers
• technical specifications (only for the protection modules)

Certification Label This label provides approved certification marks.

Warranty Label Damage or removal of the warranty label will void the warranty.
ADVA AG Optical Networking will disclaim the implied warranty of mer-
chantability.

HWDesc_3_PassMod.fm

7-4 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description


2CLSM-#D01-#D64

7.1 2CLSM-#D01-#D64

Module name
2CLSM-
#D01-#D64 Serial number
S/N: xxxxxxxxxxxx

LED indicator

Network port:
Output (N-M) for the combined C- and L band signal (#D01-#D64)
Input (N-D) for the combined C- and L band signal (#D01-#D64)

Client port 2:
Input (C2-M) for the L band signal (#D33-#D64)
Output (C2-D) for the L band signal (#D33-#D64)

Client port 1:
Input (C1-M) for the C band signal (#D01-#D32)
Output (C1-D) for the C band signal (#D01-#D32)

Item number
P/N:xxxxxxxxxx-x.xx

Fig. 7-1: 2CLSM-#D01-#D64 Front View

Faceplate Markings Table 7-1 lists all abbreviations on the 2CLSM-#D01-#D64 faceplate and
their meanings.
Table 7-1: 2CLSM-#D01-#D64 Faceplate Markings
LED Indicators Optical Ports
P power supply status of the module M multiplexing
D demultiplexing